Skip to main content

Full text of "St. Paul's Epistle to the Philippians"

See other formats


Google 


This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project 
to make the world’s books discoverable online. 


It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject 
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books 
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that’s often difficult to discover. 


Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book’s long journey from the 
publisher to a library and finally to you. 


Usage guidelines 


Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the 
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to 
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. 


We also ask that you: 


+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for 
personal, non-commercial purposes. 


+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google’s system: If you are conducting research on machine 
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the 
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. 


+ Maintain attribution The Google “watermark” you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find 
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. 


+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just 
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other 
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can’t offer guidance on whether any specific use of 
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book’s appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner 
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe. 


About Google Book Search 


Google’s mission is to organize the world’s information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers 
discover the world’s books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web 


atthtto: //books.gqoogle.com/ 


Harvard Depository 
Brittle Book 








Wiss | it 


Ps.CX yp joHu-XVu. 
i a. 
T1275 - 4 d0v0s 


oro Sar a le 


4 } =u 
7743 arrcuall f Ox XEIE TOY, 





qattG@ias 


ST PAUL’S EPISTLE 


TO THE 


PHILIPPIANS. 


FOR ENGLISH READERS. 


ST PAUL'S EPISTLE 


TO THE 


PHILIPPIANS 


WITH TRANSLATION, PARAPHRASE, AND NOTES 


FOR ENGLISH READERS. 


BY 


C. J. VAUGHAN, D.D. 


DEAN OF LLANDAFF, 
AND MASTER OF THE TEMPLE. 


Dondon ; 
MACMILLAN AND CO. 


1885 


[All Rights reserved.| 


\ 
ee” 


Cambridge : 


PRINTED BY C. J. CLAY, M.A. & SON, 
AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS. 





PREFACE. 


Tuis little work is the product of a brief season of 
seclusion (occasioned by a failure of voice) in the 
Summer and Autumn of last year. I had intended 
to include in one Volume the four Epistles of the 
same period, but the resumption of active work 
postponed this project into a future too remote and 
precarious to be waited for. 

. TI once hoped to be able to prepare an Edition of 
St Paul’s Epistles for English Readers. Many years 
ago I published the First Epistle to the Thessalonians 
as an instalment of this work, and proceeded some 
way with an Edition of the Epistle to the Galatians. 
But the arrangement was not quite satisfactory, 
and the notes were becoming too elaborate for their 
purpose. The appearance of Dr Lightfoot’s work on 
the Galatians, anticipating me in many places and 
modifying my own view in others, led me to abandon 


vi PREFACE. 


the attempt, and to cancel the sheets which were 
already struck off. | 

More than twenty years ago I published a 
Volume of Lectures on the Epistle to the Philip- 
pians, which had been delivered in the Parish Church 
of Doncaster. Each Lecture was prefaced by a very 
literal rendering (from the Greek) of the passage to 
be commented upon, the text used being that ot 
Tischendorf’s second Edition, without any attempt 
at discussion or comparison of readings. 

In the present publication I have taken as my 
basis the text of Professors Westcott and Hort, 
though I have exercised something of an independent 
judgment, and have departed in many places from 
their punctuation and paragraphing, matters too 
closely connected with interpretation to be taken at 
second hand by any commentator. It has been a 
pleasure to me thus to avail myself, late in life, of a 
work of which I was permitted more than a quarter 
of a century ago, by Dr Westcott’s kindness, to give, 
I believe, the first specimen to the Public in an 
Edition which I published:in 1859 of St Paul’s 
Epistle to the Romans. 

A publication designed, like the present, for 
English Readers must of necessity have for its most 








PREFACE. vil 


prominent feature an English translation. And that 
translation, to have any definite bearing upon the 
particular work, must of necessity be made for himself 
by the Editor. His object is not that of the Trans- 
lators of 1611 or of the Revisers of their work in 
1881. They had to make or to re-make a Version 
suitable for reading in Churches. In the latter case, 
that of the Revised Version, it was indispensable that 
new renderings should be kept in harmony with the 
old by a strict adherence to the English style and 
idiom of the Authorized. This one consideration 
marks a wide difference between that case and the 
present. The translation here given has answered 
its purpose when it has made clear to the reader the 
view of the individual annotator. He is free from 
any obligation to make his English what is commonly 
called Biblical. It is enough if he finds anywhere 
in the English language a phrase expressive of what 
he believes to be the thought of the Apostle. 

The freedom to which an individual Editor is 
evidently entitled in this particular is no less evi- 
dently his right in another. The preparation or 
revision of a Version for congregational reading must 
be made by a number of persons, entitled to an equal 
voice in the decision of each question arising in the 


viii PREFACE, 


course of it. In such decisions, by a simple majority 
or by a majority of two-thirds of those present as 
the case may be, there can be little room for striking 
or telling results. Any bold or happy suggestion 
has to run the gauntlet of a multitudinous criticism, 
and the average judgment necessarily carries the day 
against the individual intuition. It can scarcely be, 
perhaps it scarcely ought to be, but that something 
of a colourless and negative character is thus given 
to the completed work. It would be interesting, 
in a large company of Revisers, to be allowed to 
know how each man would have rendered the whole 
of one Book or one Chapter, had he been left to 
himself to do it. It is quite conceivable, without 
any impatience of the unavoidable conditions of 
composite labour, that there might be touches of 
beauty or even sparks of genius here and there in 
the separate essays, which did not survive in the 
combined and finished work. If this be so, it is 
evident that the contribution of individuals to the 
translation as well as the interpretation of Scripture 
can never really be superseded by the most careful 
or the most successful of collective and corporate 
efforts. 

No man can undertake the task of translating 








ee aeessSsrt Ts ~- a  — Ee oe oa ll ee, | a eee eee: a a ae 
a . ee 


PREFACE. 1X 


even a few Chapters of the Greek Testament, with- 
out a painful sense of failure. To produce an easy 
and spirited version of a speech of Demosthenes or a 
dialogue of Plato is by no means beyond the power 
of an expert in the two languages. But that which 
is forcible or felicitous as the rendering of a human 
composition may be in the highest degree distasteful 
in the case of an inspired writing. There the instinct 
of reverence must check alike the clever turn and 
the popular paraphrase, and the result is sure to 
bewray the limits and trammels of the process. 

In the preparation of this Volume, as in all 
previous undertakings of the same kind, I have 
abstained from any direct reference to the notes and 
comments of others. For better or worse, I have 
written down the results of my own diligent study, 
alike in the interpretation of the text and in the 
selection of passages used in illustration. It is thus, 
I think, rather than by an attempted comparison of 
the varying or conflicting opinions of previous com- 
mentators, that a man may best hope to contribute 
his little quota to the knowledge and thought of his 
generation. At the same time every one must be 
conscious how little he can have to offer which is in 
any real sense original—how much, on the contrary, 


Xx PREFACE. 


of his own contribution is the product, unconsciously 
at least, of the work of previous toilers—how true, 
in this as in every field of effort, is the humbling yet 
encouraging reflexion, ‘Other men laboured, and ye 
have entered into their labours.’ 

While professing to contemplate English readers 
rather than students of the original in this Edition 
of St Paul’s Epistle to the Philippians, I have not 
scrupled to introduce Greek words into the notes 
. where it was impossible without doing so to make 
the necessary explanations intelligible, and I have 
placed the Greek text itself on alternate pages face 
to face with the English rendering. I have hoped 
thus to make the book useful to two classes of 
readers, without losing sight of its special designa- 
tion for one. 


- THe TEMPLE, 
April 11, 1885. 





INTRODUCTION. 


THE Epistle to the Philippians belongs to a group 
of four letters, written by St Paul during that two 
years’ imprisonment at Rome with which the history 
in the Acts closes’. The references in the Epistle 
to the Preetorian camp’ and to the Emperor's house- 
hold* make the place of writing certain, while the 
allusions to his bonds‘, and to the consequences to 
himself and his work’, place beyond doubt the cir- 
cumstances of the writer. , 

Three of these four Epistles are shown by in- 
ternal evidence to be actually contemporaneous. 
Two of them, those (namely) to the Ephesians and 
the Colossians, are inseparably linked together by 
thought and phrase, by topic and order, by the 
person of the bearer and the identity of his com- 
mission’, The third, that to Philemon, is as de- 
cisively linked to the second by the name of its 

* Acts xxvili, 16, 30. * Phil. i. 13. 

* Phil, iv. 22. * Phil. i. 13. 

* Phil, i, 12, 19, &e. 

* Compare Eph. vi. 21, 22 with Col. iv. 7, 8. 

Vv. P. I 


2 INTRODUCTION. 


bearer, by one of the persons saluted, and by 
several of the persons saluting’. 

It is equally evident that the letter to the 
Philippians is entirely independent of the rest, as 
much in date as in destination. Its topics are dif- 
ferent, its language is different, its tone is different. 
Beyond the fact that in all the four St Paul is a 
prisoner, and that in three of them, and by clear 
inference in the fourth also, Timotheus is his com- 
panion’, there is nothing to prove the identity even 
of the imprisonment, much less of the point in the 
imprisonment which was the moment of the writing. 

The question therefore arises, was the Epistle to 
the Philippians prior or subsequent in time to the 
other three? And different answers have been given 
to this enquiry. 

Some have seen indications in the Epistle to the 
Philippians of an advanced stage in the imprison- 
ment, a closer and harsher treatment, and a less 
hopeful view of the result. In modification of such 
statements it may be urged that, so far from 
anticipating a fatal close, St Paul expresses in strong 
terms his confidence that, though the question of 
life or death is trembling in the balance, the issue 
will be his continuance in life’. And just as in one 
of the other three letters he bids his friend at 


* Compare Philem. ro, &c. with Col. iv. 9; Philem. 2 with 
Col. iv. 17; Philem. 23, 24 with Col. iv. 10, 12, 14. 
* Phil, i. x. Col.i.1. Philem. 1. * Phil. i. 25. 





INTRODUCTION. 3 


Colossee to prepare for his reception, as hoping to 
be (as he expresses it) ‘granted’ to those who have 
prayed for his deliverance’, so, when he writes to 
the Philippians, he is ‘hoping in the Lord that he 
shall speedily come to them”, though he fully 
recognizes the precariousness of a life still dependent 
on the casualties of a Roman trial. 

If then the argument for the later date of the. 
letter to the Philippians is thus inconclusive, does 
the subject-matter of the Epistle give any encourage- 
ment to an opposite view? It has been powerfully 
urged that it does’. 

St Paul’s Epistles are commonly divided into 
four groups or volumes, distinct from each other 
scarcely more in date than in subject. Of these 
four groups the one before us is the third. It 
follows, at an interval of four or five years, that 
weighty and massive volume of which the Epistle 
to the Galatians, the first and second Epistles to 
the Corinthians, and the Epistle to the Romans, 
are the component parts. The two Epistles to the 
Corinthians deal largely with local and personal 
matters, and though they abound in passages of 
transcendant importance and incomparable beauty, 
yet on the whole they leave to the other two, the 
first and last in the volume, the developement of that 
great controversy, which for many years of his life 

? Philem. 22. * Phil, ii. 24. 
* See Bp Lightfoot’s Introduction. 


4 INTRODUCTION. 


was the hinge and pivot of St Paul’s activity, the 
contest between a pure and a mixed Gospel, between 
Christ as the complement or supplement of Judaism 
and a Christ sufficient of Himself for the salvation 
of sinners and of the world. 

This controversy had in some measure spent 
itself when St Paul entered upon his compulsory 
retirement at Cvesarea and Rome. In the one 
Epistle of the third volume which can alone be 
called in any sense polemical, that to the Colossians, 
the form and shape of the adversary is visibly altered 
since the days of the Galatian and Roman argument. 
Ingredients there are of Judaism in the new com- 
pound—the law of ritual and ceremonial, with its 
Rabbinical glosses upon the Divine original, is still 
there, and still potent—but it is mingled now with 
other and at first sight incongruous elements, with 
an Oriental speculation and an Essene asceticism 
which carry the war into other regions, and which will, 
in the fourth and last volume of the letters, those of 
the period of freedom between the two captivities and 
of the second imprisonment itself, develope a still 
further growth of heresy, necessitating in the great 
combatant a new terminology and a new phraseology 
to deal with it, furnishing new difficulties to the 
student and new facilities to the sceptic. 

We must not anticipate the topics of other In- 
troductions. At present the remark is this—that 
the Epistle to the Philippians, in its one contro- 


’ INTRODUCTION. 5 


versial chapter, has no word for those peculiar 
vagaries of error which are the predominant subject 
of the Epistle to the Colossians. It seems im- 
probable that St Paul should entirely ignore these, 
in writing to his most dearly loved Church of 
Philippi, if they had already taken that place in his 
thoughts which they certainly occupied when he 
wrote to the Church of Colosse. The object of his 
attack in the third Chapter of the Epistle to the 
Philippians is quite that of the second volume of his 
letters, of the Epistle to the Galatians and the 
Epistle to the Romans. If this be so, is it not pro- 
bable that the Epistle to the Philippians was written 
before the old controversy had been succeeded by the 
new—that it was the connecting link (in some sense) 
between the second period and the third, though 
belonging itself to the latter, as the Epistle to the 
Colossians is the connecting link (in some sense) 
between the third period and the fourth of St Paul’s 
writings, though itself belonging to the former ? 
This consideration weighs powerfully with us in 
attempting to fix the place of the letter to the 
Philippians among the four Epistles of its group. 
We are quite aware that such arguments may be 
overstated. The spiritual circumstances, known to 
St Paul, of one Church might be wholly different 
from the spiritual circumstances, also known to 
St Paul, of another Church. To each he would 
address himself according to the requirements of 


6 INTRODUCTION. 


each. We do not think it necessary (for example) 
to change the received place of the Epistle to the 
Galatians in order to bring it next to the Epistle to 
the Romans, because it resembles it in subject or 
even in phrase. The reminiscences of a recent visit 
to Galatia, of its painful character and its distressing 
close, are too evident and too prominent in the 
Epistle to allow us to relegate it to a position which 
would imply a three or a four years’ interval between 
the visit and the letter. We still leave the two 
Epistles to the Corinthians between that to the 
Galatians and that to the Romans, supposing that 
the condition of the Corinthians made other matters 
more urgent for them than the refutation of the 
Judaizing heresy, and prepared to expect a con- 
siderable similarity, even of phrase, in writing upon 
the same subject, even at a considerable interval of 
time, to the Churches of Galatia and of Rome. 
Doubtless it might be so in the instance now before 
us. St Paul might know that the Asiatic heresy 
of Colossze would have no interest or no meaning 
for the European community at Philippi. We do 
not press it as an argument which constrains con- 
viction, only as a consideration which ought to have 
weight. 

In any case the Epistle to the Philippians cannot 
be assigned to the very beginning of St Paul's 
residence as a prisoner in Rome. Space must be 
allowed for the operation of those effects of his 











INTRODUCTION. 7 


imprisonment of which he speaks in the first chapter’. 
The spread of his influence in the Pretorian camp 
on the one hand, in the Palace of the Emperor on 
the other, must have been the work of time. There 
is one special incident of the period, known to us 
only from the Epistle itself, for which room and 
scope must be left. The Philippians had heard of 
St Paul’s coming to Rome; had sent Epaphroditus 
to Rome from Philippi with pecuniary supplies ; had 
heard of the illness of Epaphroditus at Rome; had 
even communicated to him their distress on hearing 
of it?—these four occurrences imply a certain lapse 
of time, and all of them are prior to the writing of 
the Epistle itself. Still, allowing a few months, or a 
large part of a year, for all this, the Epistle before 
us might still be the first written of the four, and 
still be separated from the other three by a very 
considerable interval. 

St Paul’s connexion with Philippi had begun 
about ten years before his arrival in Rome. Accom- 
panied by Silas from Antioch’, by Silas and Ti- 
motheus from Lystra or Derbe‘, by Silas, Timotheus, 
and Luke from Troas'’, he for the first time landed 
in Kurope, and made his first halt at the Roman 
‘colony’ of Philippi’. His work, began there on the 
humblest scale. A few women gathered in the 

* Phil. i. 13, de. > Phil. ii. 25, &c. iv. 18. 
® Acts xv. 40. * Acts xvi. 3. 
* Acts xvi. 11. * Acts xvi. 12. 


8 INTRODUCTION. 


Jewish ‘place of prayer’ by the river-side without 
the city, formed his first congregation’. The first 
convert was an Asiatic ‘ purple-seller’ from Thyatira, 
and her house became the home of the little party 
of Evangelists during their stay in Philippi’. 
Troubles soon began. A Greek slave-girl, ‘ possessed 
with a spirit of divination’, was restored to sanity 
by the word of St Paul, and her ‘masters’, who had 
trafficked in her misery, made their selfish loss a 
plea for dragging him and Silas before the ‘magis- 
trates’ (the duumviri or pretors of the ‘colony’) as 
disturbers of the peace and innovators upon thé 
Roman ‘customs’ of the self-important community’. 
The terrible scourging, the eventful night in the 
prison, the conversion of the jailer, and the triumph- 
ant exit of the sufferers, made the third act in 
the drama of the first visit‘, After a sorrowful 
parting with ‘the brethren’—the nucleus already 
formed of the future Church of Philippi—St Paul, 
with two of his companions, Silas and Timotheus, 
‘pursues his way to other towns of Macedonia, and 
from Berssa goes on alone to Athens and to 
Corinth’. 

But a mutual affection of exceptional strength 
had sprung up between him and the Philippian 
converts. Already at Thessalonica, when he had 

+ Acts xvi. 13. * Acts xvi. 15. 
® Acts xvi. 16—21. * Acts xvi. 22—40. 
* Acts xvii. xviii. 1. 








INTRODUCTION. 9 


but lately left them, they sent him supplies—ac- 
cepted by him from them alone of the Churches’. 
Again at Corinth, apparently by the hands of Silas 
and Timotheus, who had been sent back to relieve 
his anxiety about the state of some of the new 
Christian communities, the same Philippian con- 
gregation renewed its loving assistance ’. 

Six or seven years pass, and St Paul brings to 
its close his long residence at Ephesus. He then 
passes again by Troas into Macedonia’®. It is a time 
of great anxiety. The state of the Church of 
Corinth has caused him the keenest distress he has 
yet known in ‘the anxiety of the congregations‘’ It 
is from Macedonia, and in all likelihood from Philippi 
or Thessalonica, that he writes his second letter to 
Corinth’. We know nothing from the Acts of the 
Apostles of the details of this part of his journey. 
His faithful chronicler, St Luke, appears then to 
have been absent. He arrives in Greece, and 
during a three months’ abode there he writes (ap- 
parently from Corinth) his great letter to the Church 
_ of Rome’. From Greece he retraces his steps into 
Macedonia, paying his third visit to Philippi’. 
There at last St Luke rejoins him’, and by his 


* Phil. iv. 15, 16. 

” Acts xviii. 5. 2 Cor. xi. g. 1 Thess. iii. 1, 2. 

* Acts xx. 1, 2 Cor. ii 12. * 2 Cor, xi. 28. 

* 2 Cor. viii. 1. ix. 2. ° Acts xx. 2,3. Rom. xvi. 1, 23. 
” Acts xx. 3, 6. * Acts xx. 5. 


10 INTRODUCTION. 


presence opens another section of the more detailed 
biography. From Philippi, with several companions 
whose names are preserved to us’, the Apostle begins 
his voyage and his journey towards his capture at 
Jerusalem, his two years’ detention at Ceesarea, and 
his two years’ confinement at Rome. 

This brief sketch has noticed all the occasions of 
which any record remains to us of personal inter- 
course between St Paul and the Church to which he 
here writes. He was to see it once more, but not 
till after his release from the first Roman captivity. 
Then, according to the brief hint given in his first 
Pastoral letter, he, on some occasion of which no 
explanation is given, went into Macedonia from 
Ephesus, leaving Timotheus there in charge. But 
this belongs altogether to a later period of the 
history. 

St Paul is a prisoner in Rome when he writes 
this Epistle to Philippi. The last chapters of the 
Acts contain a full record of the dangerous and 
suffering voyage from Cesarea, ending in the ship- 
wreck, and of the later progress, by Syracuse and, 
Rhegium, to Puteoli, and finally by the Via Appia 
to Rome*. At Rome he was still in custody, but it 
was that least severe form of confinement which left 
the choice even of a dwelling (doubtless within 
some strict limits) free‘, and placed the prisoner 

* Acts xx. 4. 71 Tim. i. 3. 

® Acts xxvii. xxviil. 1—16. * Acts xxviii. 30. 





INTRODUCTION. II 


under the charge of a single soldier’, changed every 
few hours, to whose left arm his own right arm was 
constantly chained *, and by whom every movement 
and every utterance was necessarily overlooked and 
overheard. When we think of these Epistles as 
the work of one placed in circumstances so trying to 
flesh and blood, it must raise still higher our esti- 
mate of the greatness of that grace which alone 
could give composure to the spirits and elevation to 
the thoughts of the writer. 

St Paul was enabled to make this unsympathetic 
and uncongenial companionship minister to the great 
cause to which his life was given. His bonds, he 
tells us, were the subject of notice and comment 
through the whole camp of the Preetorians*. Never 
before, surely, had that motley concourse of rude 
and ignorant men, held together by nothing but 
the strong arm of military discipline, had the oppor- 
tunity presented to them of witnessing the refining, 
elevating, transforming influence of the new faith, 
as it was shown in its full strength and beauty 
in the character of the captive Apostle. If this had 
been all, the words would have been sufficiently 
verified, ‘The things which are befalling me have 
resulted rather in the progress than in the retro- 
gression of the Gospel 4.’ 

But St Luke opens a wider view than this of 


* Acts xxviii. 16. * Acts xxviil, 20. Eph. vi. 20. 
> Phil. i, 13. * Phil. i. 12. 


12 INTRODUCTION. 


the influences of the Apostle’s confinement, when he 
speaks of his receiving, through these two whole 
years, in his own hired lodging, all that came in 
unto him’. He applies to that private intercourse 
the very terms which belong more naturally to the 
work of one at large, ‘preaching’ and ‘teaching’’. 
We must modify our first ideas of bonds and im- 
prisonment. We must take account of that long 
day, ‘from morning till evening’, spent in earnest 
argument with ‘the chief of the Jews’ convened by 
him for the express purpose of explanation and dis- 
cussion’. We must call to mind that long list of 
Roman residents, already disciples, already per- 
sonally known to him, which is contained in the 
closing Chapter of an Epistle dated some three or 
four years before his own arrival in the capital‘. 
That list had doubtless received many additional 
names in the interval between the record of the twen- 
tieth chapter and the record of the twenty-eighth 
chapter of the Acts of the Apostles. There was 
already a Church of Rome before St Paul had to 
do with it. Already ‘their faith was proclaimed 
throughout the whole world’ when he prayed for a 
prosperous journey to visit them’. Many of them 
were known to him much more than by name at 
that earlier date’. The announcement of his having 

* Acts xxviii. 30. * Acts xxviii. 31. 

* Acts xxviii. 23. * Rom. xvi. 3—15. 

* Rom. i. 8, ro. * Rom, xvi. 3, &e. 








INTRODUCTION. 13 


reached ‘the Market of Appius’ and ‘the Three 
Taverns’ on his journey towards Rome as a prisoner 
drew forth ‘the brethren’ to meet him’. Already 
therefore the Gospel had its numerous friends and 
adherents in the Imperial city, and had even found 
its way (it is more than probable) into the vast 
. ‘family’ which crowded the Palace of the Emperor. 
The effect of his arrival and residence in Rome 
was marked and powerful. His very bonds, he says, 
instead of daunting or abashing, encouraged and 
emboldened the brethren*. A feeling of deep sym- 
pathy quickened the zeal of many to help the work 
which he could no longer himself do publicly. In 
other cases, strange as the statement sounds to us, 
an unfriendly motive prompted the activity’. There 
were those who disliked and mistrusted him, even 
within the Christian body. Whether their hearts 
were still hankering after a suppressed and dis- 
avowed Judaism, or whether some more personal 
feeling was the secret of their ill-will, we can know 
only by the vaguest conjecture. Of one thing we 
may be confident, that St Paul’s ‘rejoicing’ in the 
success even of these last‘ implies that the preaching 
was evangelical, whatever its motive. The preaching 
of ‘another Gospel’, which he hastens to say was 
‘not another’ because it had no claim to the title of 


* Acts xxvili. 15. * Phil. i. 14. 
* Phil. i 15—17. * Phil. i, 18. 


14 INTRODUCTION. 


a Gospel at all’, would certainly have been as far 
beyond his toleration when he wrote to Philippi 
from Rome as when he wrote from Ephesus to 
Galatia. We admire the magnanimity which made 
him indifferent to the motive, we could not admire 
the inconsistency which would have been involved 
in indifference to the doctrine. 

Something, however, there was in the circum- 
stances of the moment, which roused in St Paul, 
as he writes to the Philippians, the old fire of his 
jealousy for the preaching of an unmixed Christ. 
Whether from an instinctive suspicion of the secret 
unsoundness of the unfriendly preachers just men- 
tioned, or from some fresh experience, in other forms 
or other directions, of the indestructible vitality of 
the old Judaizing, he devotes one of the two most 
remarkable passages of the Epistle before us to the 
reassertion, in solemn and sublime language, of the 
Gospel pure and simple as he had preached it all 
along among the Gentiles» Nowhere are we ad- 
mitted into a closer or tenderer intimacy with the 
heart of the man in its deepest secrets of affiance 
and aspiration. ‘That I may know Him, and the 
power of His resurrection, and the fellowship of His 
sufferings. ‘This one thing I do—I press toward 
the mark’®.’ . 

The Epistle to the Philippians will ever remain 

* Gal. i 6, 7. * Phil. ili, 2, &e. 
® Phil. iii. 10, 14. 








INTRODUCTION. 15 


as the noblest example to be found anywhere in 
the inspired writings of the working of the pastoral 
heart. ‘Lovest thou me?’ then ‘feed my sheep’— 
such is the unwritten but most real epitome of the 
four Chapters which compose it. Nowhere do we 
more admiringly trace the beautiful combination of 
dignity and delicacy, of force and tenderness, in the 
character of the great Apostle, than in those more 
level passages of this short letter, in which, for 
example, he expresses his gratitude for their gifts, 
and yet his independence of all gifts ; his gratification 
in the revival of their care for him, and yet his full 
confidence that that care had never really undergone 
change or interruption. Nowhere more conspicuously 
than in the incidental disclosures of this letter to the 
Philippians do we behold the power of Divine grace 
in transfiguring the whole mind and heart of those 
who believe; cultivating and civilizing in the very 
act of evangelizing and sanctifying; calling into 
existence a whole world of beautiful feelings, generous 
affections, and unselfish impulses; above all, creating 
a, new relationship between man and man, directly 
traceable to that revelation of a free forgiveness and 
an indwelling Spirit, which is the ‘secret’, long 
hidden, in the fulness of time told, of the everlasting 
Gospel. 


The Epistle to the Philippians is rapid in its 
transitions from narrative to doctrine, from doctrine 


16 INTRODUCTION. 


to narrative. In the same degree, yr is, beyond 
most of St Paul’s Epistles, impatient of analysis. 
The following sketch aims rather to track the 
windings of its course, than to spoil its naturalness 
by an attempt to arrange or to methodize. 


I. Address and greeting . ‘ chap. i. verses I, 2. 
thankful and hopeful view of them ‘ ‘ iL 3—8. 
special desires for their growth in discernment 

and consistency . ‘ ‘ : ‘ - lL g—ti. 

II. Narrative. ; i, 12—30. 
(1) effects of his ‘ponds’, without and within 

the Christian body : , I12—I4. 


the latter presenting a painful sedate: 

non, in which yet he can find matter for 
_ satisfaction . : 1520. 
(2) his own state of mind in the areeatt 


suspense—conflicting feelings : : 2I—24. 


‘Ishallnot die, but live’—live, for your sake 25, 26. 
but, however this may be, be stedfast, 
be brave—regarding your sufferings as 


(a) a token, (6) a boon : : 27—30. 
III. Hortatory: on unity. : : : li I—TITI. 
(1) its foes—vanity, and selfishness ; 3) 4. 
(2) its motive—the example of Christ ‘ 5—ll. 
_ His voluntary self-abasement— 

(a) to human nature . : ; 6, 7. 
(6) an it— ; : > 2 : 8. 
and the great reward. ‘ g—Il. 
work out your salvation—for God woke in you li, 12, 13. 

especially in unity— 
(a) for the sake of example to others . . ll. 14, 15. 


(6) and of comfort to me, who would gladly 
die for you as I have lived for you . - ii. 16—18. 


INTRODUCTION. 


IV. Prospective 


VI. 


intentions, as to sSiariinieationa with them 
by Timotheus 
and in person ‘ 
meanwhile by Epaphroditas . 
Hortatory . . 
(1) the duty of joy : 
(2) beware of false teachers aie fail to gee 
that Christ’s people are the true Israel 
account of his own transition from the old 
trust to the new 
and of his present life of effort and cepeten 
be true to present attainments, and God will 
lead you on 
( 3) beware of the evil example of the real 
‘enemies of the cross’, the sensual and 
earthly-minded 
our life is already in heaven—our eeiecation 
that of a Saviour and a resurrection 
‘so stand fast’ : 
(4) @ particular case of discord fenidétly 
dealt with . : 
(5) several short recetaSoy--ulasttgss. 
prayer, and its blessing . 
directions for thought, and directions for sondact 
Acknowledgment of gifts 
I hail them as tokens of love 
content without, thankful for them 
you were of old, you alone, my benefactors in 
this way : 
‘I seek not yours but you’ 
‘IT have all and abound’ 
and God will not let you want ‘ 
to Him be glory . : . . ‘ 


VII. Final greetings, and benediction 


Vv. P, 


17 

ll, I9—30. 
19—23. 
24. 
25—30. 
lil. 1—iv. 9. 
I, 

25:3 
4—Il 
12—14 
15, 16 
17—I9 
20, 21 

lv, I 

2, 3 

4—T7- 

8, 9. 

lv. 10—20, 
Io. 

I—14. 

15, 16. 

17. 

18. 

19. 

20. 

lv. 2I—23 





TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


1 Pav and Timotheus, servants of Christ 


I. 1, 2. ‘We write to the 
Christians at Philippi, with their 
ministers ; and we wish you 
grace and peace.’ 

1. ZTumotheus|] Of Derbe or 
Lystra (Acts xvi. 1); already a 
‘disciple’ when St Paul visits 
those places for the second time ; 
yet claimed by St Paul as his 
‘own son in the faith’ (1 Tim. 
i. 2), converted therefore in his 
first visit (Acts xiv. 6, 23). He 
accompanied Paul and Silas, 
from Derbe or Lystra, on the 
second missionary journey, and 
was with him at Philippi in the 
first founding of the Church 
there (2 Cor. i. 19), left Philippi 
with him, but remained at Berea 
when St Paul went on to Athens 
(Acts xvii. 14), rejoined him 
either at Athens (Acts xvii. 
15) or at Corinth (Acts xviii. 
5), the passage in 1 Thess. iii. 
I, 2 being really consistent with 
either supposition. He con- 
tinued with St Paul at Corinth 
(1 Thess. i. 1. 2 Thess. i. t), was 
with him during a part at least 
of the long residence at Ephesus 
(Acts xix.) in the third mission- 


ary journey, and after being sent 
on into Macedonia (Acts xix. 
22) and to Corinth (1 Cor. iv. 
17) probably before the writing 
of the first Epistle to the Corin- 
thians (1 Cor. xvi. 10), had 
rejoined him before the second 
Epistle to the Corinthians was 
written from Macedonia (2 Cor. 
i, 1) He was with St Paul 
when he wrote to the Romans 
(Rom. xvi. 21) probably from 
Corinth (Acts xx. 2, 3. Rom. 
XV. 25, 26. xvi. 1, 23), was with 
him at Philippi on that second 
(or rather third) visit there, and 
was one of those who ‘accom- 
panied him into Asia’ (Acts 
Xx. 4) on the voyage and 
journey which ended in his 
capture at Jerusalem (Acts xxi. 
30). He is not mentioned 
during the two years’ detention 
at Czesarea, nor in the narrative 
of the voyage and journey to 
Rome, but was with St Paul 
when he wrote thence to the 
Philippians (Phil. i, 1. ii, 109, 
23), the Colossians (Col. i. 1), 
and Philemon (1). The later 
history of Timothy is known 








TWPOS OIAITTTHZIOYS, — 


TIAYAos) Kat 


only from the fragmentary hints 
in the two Epistles addressed 
to him by St Paul, the former 
written in the interval between 
the two imprisonments at 
Rome, and the latter during 
the second which ended in 
martyrdom. In the former, and 
apparently (though not ex- 
pressly) in the latter also, 
Timothy is addressed as in 
charge of the Church at Ephe- 
sus (1 Tim. i. 3), with authority 
to ordain (1 Tim. ii. 1, &e. v. 
22. 2 Tim. il. 2), to exercise dis- 
cipline over ministers (1 Tim. 
v. 19) and people (2 Tim. iv. 2), 
to regulate worship (1 Tim. 11.) 
and doctrine (1 Tim. i. 3, &c. 
2 Tim. ii. 14), to superintend 
and control institutions (1 Tim. 
v. 9—16), and generally to dis- 
charge Episcopal functions as 
the delegate and representative 
of the Apostle (1 Tim. iii. 14, 
iv. 13). Whether the charge 
was permanent or temporary 
does not appear. At all events, 
St Paul regards him as free to 
leave Ephesus, and does in fact 
summon him to his own presence 


Tipobeos, 


dovAot 


at Rome (2 Tim. iv. 9, 11, 21). 
Whether the passages about the 
ordination of Timothy (z Tim. 
1, 18. iv. 14. 2 Tim. i. 6, 14) 
refer to the charge at Ephesus, 
or to his first commission as 
an Evangelist, is not certain, 
but the latter supposition seems 
the more probable. The ‘good 
confession made by him before 
many witnesses’ (1 Tim. vi. 
12) may be a reminiscence of 
his baptism rather than of 
either of the two occasions just 
mentioned. ‘The prophecies 
which went before on (pointing 
to) thee’ (1 Tim. i, 18) were 
probably some such utterances 
of ‘ prophets’ designating Timo- 
thy for the ministry, as we 
read of in Acts xiii. 1, 2 in 
the case of the first special mis- 
sion of St Paul himself. That 
Timothy should be here as- 
sociated with St Paul in writing 
to the Philippian Church, of 
which he had assisted in the 
founding, and which he had 
visited since that time, twice at 
least, in company with St Paul, 
is quite natural. But so little 


2—2 


Xpicrou J. 1 


* 


20 TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


I. 1 Jesus, to all the saints in Christ Jesus that are in 
Philippi, with any their bishops and deacons. 


does he really share in the com- 
position of the letter that St 
Paul writes throughout in the 
singular number, and when he 
has occasion to mention Timothy 
' (ii. 19) speaks of him in the 
tbird person. The character of 
Timothy, as represented by St 
Paul in this Epistle and else- 
where, is faultless and beautiful. 
The inference of indecision and 
faintheartedness, which some 
have drawn from St Paul’s ex- 
hortations to courage and devo- 
tion in his letters to Timothy, 
seems to be quite fanciful. 
S&vants| Literally, slaves. 
That rendering might sound 
harshly in modern ears. But 
when we think of the two ideas 
suggested by the word, ovwner- 
ship on the one side and de- 
votedness on the other, we shall 
feel that to be the slave (the 
Euryvxov dpyavoy, the animated 
implement) of Jesus Christ could 
be nothing but the highest hu- 
man glory. St Paul so de- 
scribes himself in the first verse 
(also) of his Epistle to the 
Romans; and St James, St 
Peter (2 Pet. 1, 1), and St Jude 
take the same title. See also 
Gal. i. ro. Tit. i, 1 (servant 
of God). Col. iv. 12 (Epaphras 
a servant of Christ Jesus). 2 
Tim, ii. 24. 
Saints | Holy persons.The pro- 


minent thought, when the word 
(aycos) is applied to Christians 
indiscriminately, is that of con- 
secration rather than of sanctifi- 
cation; of the act of God in 
claiming as His own and caus- 
ing the response of the man to 
that claim in the Christian con- 
fession, rather than of the de- 
gree in which the life, inward 
and outward, has been brought 
into harmony with the call and 
the profession. Thus the Co- 
rinthian Christians, with all their 
faults, are addressed by St Paul 


as saints by God's call (1 Cor. i. 


2), no less than the Romans 
(Rom, i. 6). Compare 1 Cor. 
vii. 14, where the children of 
one Christian parent are said 
to be holy in virtue of that re- 
lationship. 

In Christ Jesus] These words 
belong to saints (see iv. 21) 
who are such in virtue of be- 
ing included or contained in 
Christ. See 1 Cor. 1. 30, and 
of Him (God) are ye in Christ 
Jesus. 

With any their bishops and 
deacons| An attempt has been 
made in this rendering to mark 
the absence of the definite arti- 
cle in the Greek. St Paul does 
not address the ministers of the 
Church at Philippi as known 
to him personally or by name. 
He speaks of them as the na- 





IWPOY SIAIMMIHSIOTS. 21 


‘Incov, wacw Tois ayios év Xpiore Incov trois L. 


> 9 , \ 9 , ‘ , 
ovow év Pirlo, cv ewioKoTrols Kal OtaKovols. 


tural and necessary complement 
of the Christian people. 

Bishops and deacons| It is 
obvious that bishops (érioxoror) 
here are synonymous with pres- 
byters (rpeoBvrepor). The same 
inference is justly drawn in 
Acts xx., where St Paul sum- 
mons the elders (presbyters) of 
the Church of Ephesus (verse 
17), and then addresses them 
as bishops (verse 28). In 1 Tim. 
iii., he passes at once from the 
qualifications of the bishop 
(verses 1—7) to those of the 
deacon (8—13). And in the 
Epistle to Titus, after saying 
that he had left him in Crete 
to ordain elders (presbyters), 
who must possess certain quali- 
fications, he goes on to say, for 
a bishop must be blameless (Tit. 
i. 5—g). The one term (bishop, 
overlooker) is suggestive of the 
duty, the other term (elder, 
senior) of the dignity, of the 
office. The one, a classical word 
for a particular officer of the 
Athenian constitution, may have 
been in use by preference in the 
Gentile Churches, the other in 
the Jewish. The eventual limi- 
tation of the former to the one 
chief minister of a group of 
Churches, belongs to the gene- 
ration after the Apostles, though 
already foreshadowed in the 
position of James the Lord's 


brother (Gal. i. 19. Acts xxi 
18) at Jerusalem, and in the 
functions assigned by St Paul to 
Timothy at Ephesus and to 
Titus in Crete. The perpetual 
Presence promised to the Church 
(Matt. xxviii. 20) is a living 
power, adapting the institutions 
as well as the energies of the 
Christian society to the needs 
of each age—yet so as that the 
three functions of ruling, shep- 
herding, and serving, shall al- 
ways be exercised and always 
embodied in the ministry of the 
period. At first the Apostles 
were the sole ministers; then 
Apostles and deacons; then 
Apostles, presbyters (bishops), 
and deacons; then Apostles 
(represented here and there by 
delegates), presbyters (bishops), 
and deacons; finally, bishops, 
presbyters, and deacons. Names 
and titles change, both in use 
and meaning; but the essence 
changes not. The Pentecostal 
gift of men for the service of 


men (Eph. iv. rr) has never . 


been withdrawn in any one of 
its operations ; not even where 
the particular community has 
preferred (wisely or unwisely) 
to put the Episcopal office itself 
into commission, acting by a 
council of presbyters and not by 
one ruling elder. The definition 
of Church in our Article leaves 


22 


TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


I. 2 Grace to you and peace from God our Father and 


the Lord Jesus Christ. 


3. ~=©I thank my God for all my remembrance of 
4 you, always in all supplication of mine making 
5 my supplication for you all with joy, for your 


room for this charitable and 
reasonable comprehensiveness. 

Deacons| The institution of 
the diaconate may fairly be 
traced to Acts vi., though the 
title itself does not occur either 
“ there or in any later mention of 
individuals among the seven 
(see, for example, Acts xxi. 8, 
where Philip, one of the seven, 
is styled not the deacon but the 
evangelist). There is, in fact, 
no scripture proof of the actual 
or intended permanence of the 
particular institution recorded 
in that narrative of Actsvi. It is 
not till we reach this Epistle to 
the Philippians (interpreted as it 
is by the Pastoral Epistles) that 
the office of deacon is stereo- 
typed as one of the Orders of 
the Church. Expressions such 
as those of Rom. xii. 7, and still 
more of Rom. xvi. 1, are too 
vague to be appropriated to an 
office. 

2. Grace| Grace is free fa- 
vour, the opposite alike of wrath 
(Eph. ii. 3, 5) and of debt (Rom. 
iv. 4). It differs from mercy as 
non-merit from demerit in the 
recipient. Grace might be shown 
to a worthy person ; mercy pre- 
supposes a sinful and lost state. 
Sometimes the grace expresses 


the whole of God’s love in Christ 
(see note on verse 7). Grace 
(without the definite article) 
means the putting forth of that 
free favour which in God never 
stops with feeling but manifests 
itself in blessing. Benevolence 
and beneficence are one in God. 
Hence grace in its usual theolo- 
gical sense is the natural se- 
quence and consequence of its 
sense in the original Greek. 

Peace] Peace is the harmony 
of the being; in its three rela- 
tions and aspects, towards God, 
towards itself, towards fellow 
beings (Rom. v. 1. 2 Thess. iti. 
16. Rom. xii. 18). It is the 
result of the realization of grace, 
and is commonly so placed in 
the Apostolic greetings. Twice 
only does St Paul, and once St 
John, interpose a third term, 
mercy, between the two (1 Tim. 
1, 2. 2 Tim. 1. 2. 2John 3). 

From God...and the Lord] 
An incidental and oft-recurring 
testimony, of the deepest kind, 
to the true Divinity of our Lord 
Jesus Christ. It would be as 
much insanity as blasphemy to 
wish grace and peace from God 
and—a man. 

3—11. ‘My recollection of 
you is all thankfulness, and 





HPO> PIAIINHZIOTS. 


23. 


. + . \ > ¢ 9 A ~ . e ~ N 
Yapts vuiv Kai etonvn aro Oeov watpos juwv Kat I. 2 


Kupiou *Inoou Xpierov. 


9 ~ ~ ~ 9 4 , ~ , 
EvyapioTw tw Oew HOU ERE mao Ty: VEL 3 
e ~ , , N 4 
UMWY, TWAYTOTE Ev TaGN SenoEL MoU UTEP TAVTWV 4 
e ~ N ~ A / -*~ 
UMW META Yapas THv SénoW ToLOUMEVOS, ETL THS 


every prayer of mine for you is 
full of joy. When I think of 
your united devotion to the 
Gospel from the first day until 
now, I cannot doubt that the 
good work begun in you will 
have its accomplishment in the 
day of Jesus Christ. I find my 
warrant for this confidence alike 
in your participation with me 
in personal peril and suffering, 
and in your cooperation with 
me in the support of the Gospel 
as it stands its trial at the bar 
of a hostile world. God knows 
my yearning love for you—a 
love which has its source in the 
very heart of Jesus Christ. It is 
my prayer that your love may 
abound more and more in spirit- 
ual knowledge, and in that en- 
lightened appreciation of all 
that is excellent, which shall 
both keep you till the day of 
Christ from all evil, and fill you 
also with all that fruit of right- 
eousness which Christ works in 
His people to the glory and 
praise of God.’ 

. I thank my God] Most 
of St Paul’s Epistles open with 
thanksgiving. The Epistle to 
the Galatians is the only real 


exception, and the omission 
marks the anxiety and dis- 
pleasure under the influence of 
which it was written. 

My God) The appropriating 
pronoun is used by St Paul in 
like manner in Rom. i. 8. 2 Cor. 
xii, 21. Philem. 4. Compare 
Gal. i. 20. In this Epistle it 
occurs again iv. 19. 

For| It is the same prepo- 


sition (é7/) as in verse 5, and 


there seems to be no reason for 
rendering it differently in the 
two places. See also 1 Cor. i 
4, I thank my God...for the 
grace, éc. St Paul thanks God, 
not only when he remembers 
them, but for the kind and na- 
twre of the recollection, alto- 
gether satisfactory and comfort- 
ing. 

4. Always] Notice the re- 
peated all. All my remembrance 
...always...all supplication... 
you all, The full heart will 
allow no exceptions, 

With joy| The stress lies 
here. The keynote of the Epi- 
stle is yoy. See ii 1, where a 
sort of apology is made for the 
reiteration. The reason for the 
joy follows, 


24 TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


I. 5 partnership in aid of the Gospel from the first 
6 day until now; persuaded as I am even of this, 
that He who began in you a good work will 
bring it to accomplishment in the day of Jesus 
7 Christ ; even as it is right for me to be thus 
minded in behalf of you all, because I have you 
in my heart, as being all of you, both in my bonds 
and in the defence and support of the Gospel, my 


5. or your partnership} 
Verse 4 was parenthetical. 
Verse 5 explains the thanks- 
giving of verse 3. J thank my 
God for all my remembrance of 
you...in other words, for your 
partnership, &c. 

In aid of the Gospel] Liter- 
ally, wnto the Gospel ; so as to 
further it, and help it on its way. 
Compare ii. 22. 

From the first day] of your 
receiving it. Acts xvi. 13. 

6. Persuadedas Iam| I 
thank my God for...for...per- 
suaded as IT am, &c. Further 
explanation of the thanksgiv- 
ing. 
Even of this| Literally, of 
this thing itself. Of this and 
nothing less than this. Itself is 
added to emphasize and enhance 
the thing spoken of. 

In you} Or among you. 
But the thought of the spiritual 
nature of the work is best ex- 
pressed by the former. Jn you, 
not in isolation certainly, but 
yet individually. In Gal. iii. 
3, the beginning of the work of 


grace, here expressly ascribed 
to God, is spoken of (using the 
same word) on the human side ; 
having made a beginning by (or 
im) spirit, are ye now seeking to 
be completed by (or in) flesh? 

Will bring wt to accomplish- 
ment in| Literally, will accom- 
plish tw until. A condensed 
form of expression, requiring 
the paraphrase given above. 

The day of Jesus Christ} 
The definite article can scarcely 
be dispensed with in English, 
but the Greek says a day of 
(belonging to) Jesus Christ. A 
day which, unlike these days of 
time, shall be al/ His, with no 
disturbing or conflicting inter- 
ference of alien influences, Luke 
XvV1L 30, the day on which the 
Son of Man is unveiled. Be- 
fore, there has been a veil over 
Him. 

7. Even asitis right) This 
persuasion (verse 6) 18 justified 
by my knowledge of you as being 
truly and practically my part- 
mers in the grace of God. St 
Paul does not infer their salva- 


TTPOY ®IAITIIHSIOTS. 


25 


, e ~ 9 A > aN 3 | ~ , T a2 
KOLWWVLE ULWY Els TO EVaryyeALOV a7ro THs TowTns 1. 5 


e PP 4 ~ ~ A 9 a ~ ef 
eépas aypt TOU vu" qeTroOWs avTO ToUTO, dTt 6 


e 9 9 ¢ a Wf 9 a ’ U 
6 évapEapevos év Umty Epyov ayabov émrerere 


aypt juépas Incoot Xpiorov> xabws €orw Sixatov 7 


’ q ~ ~ e .' , e ~ N a 
Efot TOVTO Ppovety veo wavTwy vw), dia TO 


af > ~ ee “ 4 a ~ 
Eye pe ev TH Kapdia Uuas, Ev TE Tots Seapois 


‘3 ~ 9» , \ ’ a 
pou Kat év TH admodoyia Kat BeBawoe Tov 


4 4 ~ f , 
evayyeAlou TuvKOLvwYOUS LOU THS YaPLTOS TaVTAas 


tion from his own love for them 
(as a hasty view of his words 
might suggest), but from the 
reason of that love ; namely, their 
being proved by their spirit and 
conduct to be united with him 
in the divine grace. 

To be thus minded| To have 
this persuasion of your safety. 

You all...all of you| There 
may be a Aint (nothing more) 
of their requiring this reminder 
of unity. See. 1, 2. iv. 2. 

I have you in my heart, as 
being] Not from a vague or 
sentimental affection for you, 
but because you are united with 
me in Christian faith and devo- 
tion. . 

Both in my bonds] Partners 
with me in grace, first in the 
fellowship of suffering, and 
secondly in the fellowship of 
the great cause. For the former, 
see verses 29, 30. Though they 
were not actually prisoners like 


him, yet his bonds were but a 


sample and specimen of that 
persecution for Christ’s sake 


which they did share with him. 
St Paul is not speaking of sym- 
pathy but of fellow-suffering, 
two different ideas, for which 
the Greek has two different 
words. 

And in the defence} Com- 
pare verse 16, knowing that 
I am appointed to aid the de- 
Jence of the Gospel. In both 
places the word defence is un- 
avoidably open to misunder- 
standing. The Greek term 
(arroAoyia) with a simple geni- 
tive after it does not mean the 
defence of another person, but 
one’s own defence. See 2 Tim. 
Iv. 16, at my firat defence no 
man sided with me, So in the 
text. The Gospel is represent- 
ed as being on its trial, engaged 
in defending itself against a 
charge of falsehood or impos- 
ture. And in this Gospel’s 
self-defence St Paul and these 
Philippians are represented as 
siding with it. Partners with 
me in grace, both (1) in the mat- 
ter of enduring persecution like 





26 


I. 8 fellow-partners in the divine grace. 


TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


For God is 


my witness how I long after you all in the 


9 affections of Christ Jesus. 


And this I pray, that 


your love may still more and more abound in 
10 knowledge and all perception, to the end ye may 


me and with me, and (2) in the 
matter (a) of the Gospel’s defence 
of itself, and (b) of the support of 
it by active help and testimony. 

In the divine grace] The 
insertion of the epithet is de- 
signed to indicate the definite 
article of the Greek. The grace 
is the sum total of God’s self- 
manifestation in Christ for the 
salvation and blessing of man. 
See especially Tit. ii. 11, the 
grace of God appeared (had its 
Epiphany) bringing salvation 
to all men. And so (frequently) 
in closing benedictions, the 
grace (the great, the divine 
grace, in which alone we have 
our new being) be with you in 
all its fulness of power and 
blessing. Eph. vi. 24. Col. iv. 
18. Heb. xiii. 25. 1 Tim. vi. 21, 
2 Tim. iv. 22. Tit. ui. 15. 

8. God is my witness| The 
same appeal is made in the same 
connexion in Rom. 1. 9. Some- 
times it is expressed with yet 
stronger emphasis, as in 2 Cor, 
i. 23. Compare 1 Thess. ii. 5, 
1o. St Paul read our Lord's 
prohibition of any stronger mode 
of assertion than the simple Yea, 
yea, Nay, nay (Matt. v. 37), in 
the spirit rather than in the 


7 ee 


letter; as forbidding a light and 
trifling introduction of the name 
of God, not a serious appeal to 
Him on grave and important 
subjects. 

I long after you| Compare 
Rom. i. 11, J long to see you. 2 
Tim. . 4, longing to see thee. St 
Paul, as natural as he was spi- 
ritual, was not satisfied without 
the sight and presence of those 
whom he loved. 

In the affections of Christ 
Jesus| The original expression 
is more graphic, but can scarcely 
be literally rendered. The Au- 
thorized Version here and else- 
where translates it (omrAayxva) 
in accordance with a _phrase- 
ology now obsolete, by the word 
bowels. This was never an 
accurate rendering, the Greek 
denoting the larger interior 
organs of the body, not the in- 
testines. Thus the word heart 
is often the best rendering, as 
combining the physical form 
with the moral idea. In the 
short Epistle to Philemon, the 
word occurs three times in this 
sense, verses 7, 12, 20, the hearts 
of the suints...my very heart... 
refresh my heart in Christ. It 
must not be narrowed to the 








MIPOS SIAINIMHSIOTS. 


27 


~ : , , ~ 
Uuas OvTas. papTus yap pou 6 Oeos ws émitroba I. 8 


mavras Upas év orrAayyvors Xpiorou noob. Kary 
TOUTO TpOTEVY Opal, iva i ayamn Vw ETL MaAAOV 
Kai uahAov tepiooevn ev ervyvwoe Kal Tan 
aicOnoe, eis TO SoKiuaCew Uuas Ta SiaepovTa, 10 


sense of mercy or compassion; 
it is moreinclusive. See 2 Cor. 
vl. 12, ye are not straitened 
in us, but ye are straitened in 
your own affections. And vii. 
15, and hts affection is more 
abundantly toward you, cc. 
When compassion is intended, 
it is added to the word, as in 
Luke 1. 78, through the tender 
mercy (the heart of mercy) of our 
God. And Col. iii. 12, a heart 
of compassion. In the verb 
formed from it the idea of com- 
passion does (by usage) prepon- 
derate. In the text St Paul 
says that he longs after them in 
the affections of Christ Jesus; 
that is, with an affection which 
has its source in the heart of 
Christ Himself. 

9. And this I pray] He 
has spoken (verse 4) of his con- 
stant supplication for them, and 
now he says what the aim of 
his supplication is. And this ts 
the object of my prayer for you, 
that your love, dc. He might 
_ have called it the subject of his 
prayer, but the Greek makes it 
the aum or purpose. In fact, sub- 
ject and object, purport and pur- 
pose, in this connexion are only 
different modes of expression. 


Abound in knowledge| He 
assumes their love, towards God 
and man, and prays that that 
love may abound (may have its 
redundance and overflow) in the 
Jorm and shape of knowledge. 
Another turn might be given 
to the thought, enverting the pro- 
cess, and making knowledge the 
way to abounding in love: that 
your love may abound in (through 
the acquisition and exercise of) 
a deepening knowledge. It is 
equally true in divine things to 
say that to know 1s to love, and to 
say that to love is to know. But 
St Paul prefers the latter (1 Cor. 
Vili. 3), and it is the preferable 
explanation here. 

Knowledge| The compound 
form (ériyvwors) used here, and 
predominantly in St Paul’s E- 
pistles of this andof the one later 
group, suggests the thought of 
JSurther (and so true, deep, spurit- 
ual, as distinguished from su- 
perficial or merely intellectual) 
knowledge, whether of divine 
truth (Col. 11. 2), the divine 
will (Col. i. 9), or of Christ 
(Eph. iv. 13) or God Himself 
(Col. i. 10). The contrast im- 
plied is that of Job xlii 5, J 
have heard of Thee by the hear- 


28 TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


. Ioapprove the things that are excellent, that ye 
may be clear and consistent against the day of 
11 Christ, filled with the fruit of righteousness, 
which is through Jesus Christ to the glory and 


praise of God. 


ang of the ear, but now mine eye 
seeth Thee. 

Perception| The word (ato- 
@yors) is used only here in the 
New Testament. In the Sep- 
tuagint it occurs in Prov. i. 22. 
li. 10, fools hate knowledge... 
(when) knowledge. 18 pleasant 
unto thy soul. The verb occurs 
in Luke ix. 45, t¢ was concealed 
from them, that they should not 
percewe wt. The idea is that 
of apprehension by the senses. 
Christians receive as it were 
@ new sense, as of touch or taste, 
by which they discriminate the 
properties of things proposed to 
them for thought or action. 
The explanation follows. 

10. Approve the things that 
are excellent] Or, discriminate 
things that difer. Both words 
are ambiguous. (1) Zo prove 
and to approve, (2) to differ and 
to excel, are equally correct and 
equally common uses of the two 
words. Thus (1) rt Theas. v. 
21, prove all things. 1 Thess. 
li. 4, we have been approved of 
God to be entrusted with the 
Gospel. (2) Gal. il. 6, a¢ maketh 
mo difference to me. Luke xii. 
7, ye are of more value than (ye 
excel) many sparrows. Here, 


and in Rom. ii. 18, either ren- 
dering would be suitable. The 
one gives the process, the other 
‘the result. Zo discriminate 
differences is (with a Christian) 
to approve excellences. 

Clear] Or, pure, A pecu- 
liar word (¢iAtxpivys) of doubtful 
derivation. Three suggestions 
have been made for it; one con- 
necting it with the idea of test- 
ing by the sunbeam, another 
with that of sifting by rolling, 
the third with that of dividing 
an army into distinct troops and 
regiments. In Scripture it is 
found only here and in 2 Pet, 
iii. 1. It expresses clearness 
from all admixture of heteroge- 
neous or incongruous elements. 

Consistent] A paraphrastic 
rendering of the word (azpoo- 
xorros), which has no_ real 
English equivalent. Jnoffen- 
sive, though literally approxi- 
mate, scarcely suggests the true 
meaning, which is literally free 
Jrom stumblingblocks, and is ap- 
plied in Ecclus. xxxii. 21 toa 
smooth and level road which 
presents no stones or other 
obstacles for the traveller to 
stumble over. Compare Matt. 
iv. 6 (from Psalm xci. 12). And 











IPOS ®IAINMHSIOTS. 29 
yg > > ~ A 9 , 3 e a 

iva nTe ElALKpLVElS Kat aTpOTKOTOL Els NMEpaV I. 10 
Xpirrov, TETANPW EVOL Kap7rov Sikatoouvns Tov II 


~ ~ ww ~ 
dia "Incov Xporou ets So€av Kat Erracvov Oeov. 


thisseemsto suggest as the sense 
of the word in its moral appli- 
cation, not*so much that of 
freedom from stumbling, but 


rather of giving no occasion of . 


stumbling. 1t occurs three times 
in the New Testament. Acts 
xxiv. 16, @ conscience void of 
stumblingblocks, presenting no- 
thing to shock or stagger it as 
it retraces the steps of the life. 
1 Cor. x. 32, present no stum- 
blingblock whether to Jews or 
Greeks. Thus here St Paul de- 
sires that they may be so con- 
sistent in their Christian course 
as to offer nothing for others to 
stumble over, either in the way 
of evil example, or of reproach 
to the Gospel. The word is thus 
equivalent to the longer phrase 
of 2 Cor. vi 3, Giving no offence 
(occasion of stumbling) in any- 
thing. See also Rom. xiv. 13, 
20. 1 Cor. vill. 9, 13. 

Against| Literally, unto. 
Not in the sense of wntz/, as in 
verse 6 (axpr), but rather of for ; 
that is, in expectation of and 

preparation for. 
. 11. Filled with the fruit] 
The figure is that of a tree laden 
with fruit. Compare Isai. 1x1. 
3, That they might be called trees 
of righteousness, the planting of 
the Lord, that He might be glo- 
rified. The parallel is the 


more remarkable from the com- 
bination of the two thoughts, of 
righteousness as the fruit, and 
the glory of God as the object. 
Compare verse 11 of the same 
chapter. 

Fruit of righteousness | Fruit 
consisting of (which is) righte- 
ousness, 

Righteousness| Used here 
in its moral and spiritual sense, 
the fulfiment of relations to- 
wards man and towards God. 
See, for example, 2 Cor. vi. 7, 
Eph. vi. 14. 

Which is through Jesus 
Christ} Reminding them that 
true righteousness, even in its 
sense of a holy life, can only be 
attuined by the grace of Christ. 

To| As the final aim and 
goal. See Rom. xi. 36. 

Glory and praise| Glory is 
self-manifestation, and pravse 18 
the echo and reflexion of it in 
admiring and adoring love. 
Compare Eph. i. 6, 12, to the 
proise of the glory of His grace 
...that we should be to the pravrse 
of His glory. 

12—20. ‘You have heard 
of my condition—a prisoner 
waiting his trial; and you may 
have inferred from it hindrance 
and damage to the great cause. 
It is not so. Rather has it 
helped the Gospel. The report 





I.*12 


) 


30 TO THE PHILIPPIANS, 
Now I wish you to know, brethren, that my 


matters have resulted rather in the progress than 
13 the decline of the Gospel; so that my bonds are 
become notorious (in Christ) throughout all the 
camp of the guard and to all the rest of the people, 
14and that the multitude of the brethren in the 


of my imprisonment has spread, 
not without effect, through the 
camp and throughthe city. Its 
influence too upon the Christian 
body has been stimulating rather 
than depressing. From various 
motives, of affection for me or 
the contrary, Christ is preached 
with increasing energy. Some 
recognize my mission as the ad- 
vocate of an accused Gospel, and 
are stirred by love to help me. 
Others in a spirit of jealousy 
and partisanship think to vex 
me in my compulsory inaction 
by taking the word from me 
and preaching it in my stead. 
Whatever the motive, Christ is 
preached, and in this I do and I 
shall rejoice. If there is trial 
in it for me, it shall be over- 
ruled for blessing. Pray for me, 
and the supply of the Spirit of 
Jesus Christ shall come to me: 
I shall be bold to speak, and 
whether by life or by death 
Christ shall be magnified in my 
body.’ 

12. My matters] The things 
which relate to me. So Eph. vi. 
21.Col.iv. 7. With a different 
preposition, but with scarcely a 
shade of difference of meaning, 


ii. 19,20, Your affairs (the things 
which concern you). 

Have resulted rather in| 
Literally, have come rather unto. 
An unusual expression : compare 
Mark iv. 22, Neither was any 
thing kept secret, but that it should 
come to light (come unto, result 
in, that which is manifest). 

Progress| Not Jurtherance. 
The word (mpoxo7y) is neuter, 
not transitive; like the verb: 
from which it is formed (to make 
progress, to go forward ; Luke ii. 
52. Rom. xiii. 12). It occurs 
again in verse 25. Also 1 Tim, 
iv. 15. 

13. In Christ] In whom 
I live (verse 21); in whom there- 
fore all happens which befalls 
me. 

Throughout all the camp of 
the guard] Literally, in the 
whole of the Pretoriwm; that is, 
the campof the Pretorian guard, 
established by the Emperor Ti- 
berius in immediate contact with 
the city. St Paul’s imprison- 
ment was of that kind which 
consisted in having the right 
arm chained to a soldier's left 
arm (Acts xxvili. 16 and 
Eph. vi. 20, where the literal 

















IPOS ®IAINMHSIOTS. 31 


TwwoKev € yuas BovrAouat, adedgoi, Tt Tal. 12 


> 9 A ~ > A ~ 9 , 
KaT ee padXov Els TpoKoTNv Tou EevayyeAtou 
9 a ee A 4 A 
éAndubev, wore Tous deauous pov avepous ev 13 


“~ , > a , \ ~ 
Xpiorw yeverOa év dAwW TH TMpatTwplw Kal ToIS 
é é é é 


~ “~ q N 4, ~ ~. 
Aotrois maow, Kat Tous TAELOvas TWY adEeAPw 14 


rendering would be in a@ cou- 
pling chain or handcuff’). The 
periodical changing of his guard 
would send back into the Pre- 
torian camp one soldier after 
another more or less impressed 
by the remarkable prisoner 
whose inseparable companion he 
had been during the hours of 
his watch, and may well ac- 
count for the statement of the 
text. 

And to all the rest} Thatis, 
of the population of Rome. A 
hvperbolical expression doubt- 
less, but conveying the true im- 
pression to his readers. Com- 
pare iv, 22, which speaks of the 
spread of the Gospel among the 
retainers and domestics of the 
Emperor himself. For a like 
hyperbole, see Col. i. 23, the Gos- 
pel...which was preached in all 
creation which is under heuven. 

14. The multitude of the 
brethren| Literally, the ma- 
jority of the brethren. But the 
phrase (oi aAcioves) is far more 
inclusive than that literal ren- 
dering would make it. From 
the universal practice of de- 
ciding matters by the vote of 
a majority (whatever the kind 


of assembly or community in 
question), the term comes to 
mean the main body, the society 
as a@ whole, without any intima- 
tion of a dissenting minority, 
and differs in no appreciable de- 
gree from the well-known phrase 
the many (oi rodXoi). In x Cor. 
ix. 19, the majority means the 
multitude of mankind, and is 
practically coextensive with the 
all men of the preceding clause. 
In 2 Cor. ii. 6, the majority 
means the Church as a body, not 
suggesting that there had been 
a close (or any) division of votes. 
So in 2 Cor. iv. 15, the grace 
(shown in St Paul’s continued 
life and activity) having a- 
bounded through the prayers of 
the majority conveys no idea of 
an indifferent or unkindly mi- 
nority, but points to the commu- 
nity as making intercession. 
And thus in the text St Paul 
speaks of the Christians in Rome 
generally as having been stirred 
into activity by his imprison- 
ment. 

Brethren in the Lord| These 
words should be taken together. 
All Christians are brothers (not 
in flesh but) in Christ. 


32 TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


. 14 Lord, relying upon my bonds, are more abundantly 
15 bold to speak the word of God fearlessly. Some 
indeed preach Christ even through envy and 
16 strife, and some also through good will: the one do 
wt from love, knowing that I am appointed to aid 
17 the defence of the Gospel ; but the other proclaim 


Christ from partisanship, not sincerely, suppos- 
ing that they thus raise a vexation for my bonds. 
18 But it vs not so; for what 1s the result but that every 
way, whether in pretence or in truth, Christ is 
proclaimed ? and herein I rejoice—yea, and I shall 


Relying upon my bonds] 
Such is the literal rendering, and 
it seems to need no paraphrase. 
His imprisoninent was a sort of 
stronghold or safeguard to them. 
It showed them that the Gospel 
was something realand precious, 
if he felt it thus worth suffering 
for. 

15. Through envy and strife] 
Jealousy of St Paul, and quar- 
relsomeness of disposition. 
Strange as the statement may 
seem, it is repeated and empha- 
sized in verse 17. 

16. The one| These last. 
Verses 16 and 17 are transposed 
(as above) in the revised text, 
so as to invert the reference to 
the two classes mentioned be- 
fore. 

Am appointed| Literally, 
lie, am laid, set, or placed. Luke 
li. 34, this child is set for the fall 
and rising, dc. 1 Thess. ili. 3, 


we are appointed hereunto. 

To aid the defence| Literally, 
unto the Gospel’s defence ; that 
is, to help the Gospel in its 
defence of itself on its trial. See 
note on verse 7. 

17. From partisanship] The 
Greek word (épiHeia) is derived 
from one meaning a worker for 
here, and seems to have early 
taken a bad colour (like our 
word jobbery) from its connexion 
with the idea of putting the 
hand to any low job for a day’s 
pay. The Authorized Version 
renders it strife, by an apparent 
mistake as to its derivation. 
The idea of faction, intrigue, 
party-spirit belongs to it in its 
Scripture use by St Paul (Rom. 
li. 8. 2 Cor. xii. 20. Gal. v. 20. 
Phil, it. 3) and St James (iii. 
14, 16) in association with jea- 
lousy, wrath, backbiting, &ec. 

Not sincerely] Not from 








TIPOY PIAITITIHSIOTS. 33 


éy Kupiw merootas trois Sexuois pou I. 
Kupig pots sou mepio-I. 14 

~ A , om ~ 

coTEepws ToAuav apoBws Tov Aoyov Tov CeEou 


AanXeitp. 


Twes pev kal dia Odvov Kai epi, 15 


A A 4 A 
twes dé kal 6’ evdoxiay Tov Xpioroy Knpvo- 
e \ 9 ) , 2Q / / 4 9 
govow ot bev EF ayarns, etdores Ste Eis atro- 16 
, ~ ~ e 9 
Aoyiav Tov evayyeAiou Keita ot O€ EF EpiHelas 17 
A A , ~ 
tov Xpiorov katayyeNXNovow, ovX ayvws, ot0- 


pevot Orin éyeipew Tots Secpois pov. 


Tt yap 18 


4 e/ 4 4 wo 4 a 
TAnV OTL TaVT’ TpOTW, ELTE Mpohace ETE 


adnleia, 


pure motives. Connected by de- 
rivation with holy (aytos), this 
word (ayvds) has the special 
idea of chaste in such passages as 
Tit. ii. 5. 2 Cor. xi, 2. 1 Pet. iii. 
2; and even where this is‘ less 
prominent (as in 2 Cor. vil. 11 
and 1 Tim. v, 22) it still sug- 
gests the thought of a sensitive 
delicacy of feeling and action. 

Raise a vexation] The word 
affliction (elsewhere suitable as 
the rendering of OAijis) seems 
here scarcely expressive of the 
exact thought, which is that of a 
new pressure or tightness given 
to St Paul’s chain by the know- 
ledge that unfriendly lips are pro- 
claiming his Gospel. The change 
of rendering (ravse for add) is 
due to a change of reading (éyei- 
pew for émipepery). 

18. But it is not so; for 
what] The for is difficult, and 
seems to imply a suppressed 
clause. The rendering What then? 


VP, 


Xpioros KaTayyéAAeTat ; 


A > 
Kae eV 


seems to cut rather than to untie 
the knot, and is (besides) the 
translation of a different phrase 


(ré ovv;) found in Rom. iii. 9. 


vi. 15. &c. I have removed the 
note of interrogation to the end 
of the sentence, and have read 
straight on, For what is it but 
that every way, &c., For what is 


the result bué this—that every 


t 


way, &e. 

Every way| Whatever be 
the motive of the preacher, false 
or sincere. 

And herein I rejowe} Is this 
the same man who says to the 
Galatians (v. 10), He that trou- 
bleth you shall bear his judgment, 
whosoever he be, with still strong- 
er words following? The ques- 
tion involves another. Are the 
insincere preachers here de- 
scribed faulty in doctrine (as 
mixing up the Gospel with Ju- 
daism), or only in motive? If 
the former, we have St Paul 


3 








34. TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


. Ig rejoice: for I know that this shall issue for me 
in salvation, through your supplication and the 
20 supply of the Spirit of Jesus Christ ; according to 
my earnest expectation and hope, that in nothing 
I shall be ashamed, but in all boldness of utterance, 
as always, so now also, Christ shall be magnified 

in my body, whether by life or by death. 


saying, ‘ Better an imperfect 
Gospel than none;’ which, how- 
ever much might be said for it, 
does not seem like him. There 
is nothing sazd of erroneous 
doctrine; and in the absence of 
any such statement, it appears 
safer to suppose (painful as it is 
to think of) sawnd preaching by 
unsound men. 

19. his} The painful ex- 
perience of being silent while 
others preach, and some of them 
in so unfriendly a spirit. Even 
this shall be one of those all 
things which work together for 
good to them that love God (Rom. 
Vili. 28). 

Through your supplication] 
St Paul attached immense im- 
portance to intercessory prayer. 
See, for example, 2 Cor.i. 11, ye 
also helping together in our be- 
half by your supplication, that 
for the free gift bestowed upon 
us by means of many thanks may 
be given by many persons in our 
behalf. Compare also 2 Cor, iv. 
Teo: % 
And the supply| Thereisa 
peculiarity in the Greek, which 


places the prayer and the answer 
under the wnculum of a single 
article. So certain is the an- 
swer that it can be spoken of in 
the same breath with the prayer. 

Supply| The noun (émxopy- 
yia) occurs but twice in Scrip- 
ture, here and in Eph. iv. 16. 
The cognate verb (simple or com- 
pound) is used more frequently. 
They are borrowed from a well- 
known Athenian custom, by 
which the wealthier citizens un- 
dertook various public services 
(Aecroupyias), one of which was 
the equipment and training of 
a chorus for one of the Greek 
dramatic performances. Losing 
all that was distinctive in their 
first meaning, the words came to 
mean simply supply, to supply, 
and are used in Scripture for the 
divine giving, whether providen- 
tial (2 Cor. ix. 10) or spiritual. 
Thus Gal. iii. 5, He that supplieth 
to you the Spirit, and worketh 
(supernatural) powers wm you, 
dc. 2 Pet.i.5,11. The parallel 
passages in Eph. iv. 16 and Col. 
ll. rg are explained by the text. 
The vital supply of which they 








TIPO>, PIAIIMHSIOTS. 


a , AX A 4 4 ‘ 
TOUTW XaAtLpW, a a Kae XapncTopat 


35 
oioa L. 19 


A e/ ~ , / 
yap OTt TOUTO pot droBnoEeTaA Els Twrnpiay 


A ~ e ~ rd 
dia THs Uuwv denoews 


kal émiyopnyias Tou 


, 3 “~ “~ A \ ] 
mvevuatos Incou Xpiorov, Kata TyHv amoKa- 20 
4 A 9 , 14 9 ) A 9 
padokiay kat éAmida pov OT év ovdevi aio- 

6n Ar’ 3 , / e€ / 
yuvOnocopa, 2 évy maon Twappynoia ws mav- 
~ , A ~ 
TOTE Kal vuv peyaduvOnoerat Xpioros év TH 
, , of \ ~ Ny A , 
cwuaTi pov, cite dia Cons eite dia Oavarov. 


speak as transmitted through 
the whole Christian body is here 
expressly described as that of 
the Spirit of Jesus Christ. 

20. Earnest expectation| It 
is but one word in the Greek 
(azoxapadoxia), watching (for 
some expected object) as with 
outstretched head. It occurs 
only here and in Rom. viii. 19. 

Ashamed| Either (1) abash- 
ed into cowardice or compro- 
mise; a sense which suits well 
the boldness of utterance which 
follows in the next clause, but 
which would seem to have re- 
quired never rather than in no- 
thing to be joined with it: or 
(2) put to shame by failure or 
disappointment. Thus 2 Cor. x. 
1. 1 John ii. 28, 

In all] That is, in the use 
or exercise of all boldness, 

Boldness of utterance] The 
word (zrappyoia) properly means 
Srankness of speech arising from 
JSreedom of heart, and it goes 
well with Christ shall be mag- 
nified. Compare Eph. vi. 19. 


If it is so taken, St Paul, 
having begun with the thought 
of magnifying Christ by bold 
oral confession, enlarges it after- 
wards into that of entire devo- 
tion for life and death. Such 
an expansion of thought in the 
course of a sentence is charac- 
teristic of his writings. See, 
for example, verse 209. 

Magnified in my body] To 
magnify (as to hallow or to glo- 
rify) means not to make, but to 
declare, manifest ; treat as, dc. It 
is the first word of the Magni- 
Jicat (Luke i. 58). See Acts x. 
46. xix.17. Christ shall be shown 
and seen as that Great One (com- 
pare Acts xxii. 14, and see that 
Just One) in each action and 
each condition of my body, by my 
counting Him worth living for 
and worth dying for. 

21—26. ‘For what is life 
to me, and what is death? To 
me to live is Christ, and to die 
is gain. To live on is to work on 
—and this has its profit. I 
shall see of my travail, and be 


3—2 


36 


21 


TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 
For to me to live is Christ, and to die is gain. 


22 And if to live on in flesh 1s my portion, this is to 
me the profit of labour; and what I shall choose 
23 I know not, but I am in a strait between the 
two, since my desire is toward departing and 
being with Christ—for that is far, far better— 


satisfied. Suppose the choice 
given me, to live or to die—what 
shall I say? It is a perplexing 
question. Each of the alterna- 
tives has its attraction. To de- 
part is to be with Christ—that, 
if I think of myself alone, is be- 
yond compare desirable. But 
for you it may be better that I 
should continue. I may still 
aid your progress, I may still 
help your joy. This thought 
assures me that my race is not 
quite run. I shall not die but 
live; I shall see you again, and 
your Christian trust and hope 
shall be enlarged and strength- 
ened thereby.’ 

21. To lveis Christ] The 
expression is more commonly 
found in its converseform, Christ 
as our life (Col. iii. 4). But 
here, the life spoken of is (as the 
context shows) this present life, 
Compare Gal. ii. 20, that life 
which I now live in the flesh I 
live in the faith of the Son of God. 
To live (in the flesh) 18 Christ to 
me. I breathe Him, I eat and I 
drink Hum (John vi. 57), will 
Him, I speak Him, I act Him— 
an one word, J live Him. 

And to die] Not the act of 


a ey a 


dying, but the having died; the 
having (as the Greek expresses 
it) done the one act of dying. 
In this respect the aorist differs 
from the perfect, which would 
mean the state after death. 

, 22, And if] In this dif- 
ficult verse, which on any view 
of it is abbreviated and ellipti- 
cal in its form, the rendering 
adopted (which is substantially 
that of the Authorized Version, 
and which stands in the margin 
of the Revised) appears the sim- 
plest and the least involved. 
Life and death, literal life and 
death, are the subject, from the 
closing words of verse 20. Life 
is Christ, and death is gain. 
And (not but, for it is sequence, 
not antithesis) 7f to live on in 
Jlesh is my portion, this is to me 
Fruit (consisting) of work; this 
has the profitable result of en- 
abling me still to work. And 
then, instead of directly stating 
the conflicting advantage of the 
opposite alternative, that of his 
death, he passes at once to the 
difficulty of deciding between 
the two, and leaves till a later 
clause the statement which logi- 
cally should havé stood earlier. 


IPOS SIAINMHSIOTS. 37 


"Euot yap ro Cyv Xpioros Kat To dzo-I. 21 


Gaveiv Ke€poos. 


A \ ~ , 
et dé TO Gv év oapKt, TOUTO jot 22 


, / / 
KapTros Epyou’ Kai Ti aipyoouat ov yvwpiCo, 
f N 9 ~ 4 A 9 , 54 
cuvexouar bé éx Twv dvo, Thv émOupiav Eywy 23 
? A 9 ~ 4 A ~ > a 
els TO avadvoa Kat cuy Xpiotw eivat, wow 


Profit of labour| The geni- 
tive is explanatory or .apposi- 
tional. Profit consisting of (or 
which 1s, being interpreted) 
labour. The advantage of being 
able to work on for Christ and 
the Church. 

And what| That. is, which 
of the two. 

Shall choose] Supposing the 
choice between life and death 
offered me. 

I know not} The ordinary 
sense of the word (yvupifw) in 
the Greek Testament is to make 
known, to declare. Thus it 
would be equivalent here to our 
phrase, J cannot tell. But the 
rendering given above is a legi- 
timate meaning of the Greek 
verb, and seems to suit the 
sense better. 

23. Lf am w a strait be- 
tween| Literally, J am stratt- 
ened (placed under painful pres- 
sure) on the part of the two con- 
flicting claimants for my pre- 
ference, life and death. The 
word straitened (ovvéyopat) is 
used in Luke viii. 45 for the 
pressure of the thronging mul- 
titude; in Luke xix. 43 for the 
hemming in of the city by its 


besiegers; in Luke xii. 50 for 
our Lord’s sense of constraint 
and limitation till His baptism 
of blood shall be accomplished. 
From it is derived the word 
(cvvoyn) rendered distress in 
Luke xxi, 25, and anguish in 2 
Cor. ii. 4. 

Since my desire is toward] 
More exactly, having my desire 
unto. If it were a question of 
inclination, it would: be soon 
settled. But there is another 
side to it. 

Departing and being] The 
former is a single act, the latter 
a continuing state. The word 
for departing (avaA\doar) is taken 
either from the breaking up of 
an encampment, or from the 
loosing of the cable in setting 
sail, Either metaphor is beau- 
tiful and suggestive as St Paul’s 
expression for dying. Compare 
2 Tim. iv. 6, the tume of my 
departure(avadvoews) 18 at hand. 

And being with Christ] In 
some real sense, therefore, this 
is the instant consequence of 
dying. See 2 Cor. v. 8, willing 
rather to be away from home from 
the body and to be at home with 
the Lord. Luke xxiii. 43, to- 


38 


TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


. 24 but to continue in the flesh is more necessary for 


25 your sake. 


And having this persuasion I know 


that I shall continue, and continue with you all, 

26 to aid your progress and joy in the faith, that 
your glorying may abound, in Christ Jesus, through 
me by my presence with you again. 


27 


day shalt thow be with me in 
Paradise. 

Far, far better| The Greek 
is, much more better. The double 
comparative is without a paral- 
lel in the Greek Testament, and 
carries an immense emphasis. 

24. Tocontinue in the flesh] 
Literally, to remain at, upon, 
attached to, the flesh. So in va- 
rious connexions, Rom. vi. 1. 
XL 22,23. Col.i. 23. 1 Tim. iv. 
16. 

More necessary| The other 
alternative is the better in it- 
self and for me; this the more 
beneficial to others, and there- 
fore the one which has the com- 
parative mus¢ in it. 

25. This persuasion] Name- 
ly, that my life is more neces- 
sary than my death. 

I know| This expression 
must not be understood as an 
inspired prediction (though it 
was doubtless in this case veri- 
fied by the event), but only as a 
strong present conviction. St 
Paul used the same word at 
Miletus to the Ephesian elders 
(Acts xx, 25), L know (oiéa) 


Only live your citizenship as is worthy of the 


that ye shall see my face no more, 
and yet lived to revisit Ephesus 
(x Tim. i. 3). 

Continue, and continue with | 
The repetition of the word con- 
tinue is required by the Greek. 
The first time it means (as in 
verse 24) continuance in life, 
the second time continuance 
with his Philippian and other 
Churches. 

To aid| Literally, wnto. 

Progress| See note on verse 
12, 

Joy in the faith] Literally, 
of. <A joy belonging to, and so 
derived from, inspired by, the 
Jaith, that is, the Gospel. It 
is somewhat difficult to decide 
between the renderings, your 
JSaith, and the faith. But that 
the latter is a legitimate ren- 
dering can scarcely be doubted 
by a careful student (to take a 
single example) of Gal, ii. 22— 
26, where we have a remarkable 
alternation of the word faith 
with and without the definite 
article in a way which can 
scarcely be casual or undesigned. 
The terms coming and being re- 





TIPOS ®IAITTMHSIOTS. 39 


yap MadAov Kpelooov, TO de éméver TH oapKil. 24 


/ ~ 
dvayKatorepoy ov vas. 


\ ~ A 
Kal TovTo merous 25 


3 e/ “~ A ~ ~ ~ 5) A 
oida STt MEvw Kal TapaMEvw Wao UV Es THY 


~ A Q N “~ , e/ ‘ 
UMWY WeoKoTNY Kal Yapav THS TIOTEWS, iva TO 26 


, ~ tA ~ ~ 9 
KQUXNMa UMwY TEpLoceEUN ev Xptotw ‘Inoov ev 


A “~ 7 “ , , 4 ~ 
€uot Ola THS Euns Tapovoias wadw mpos Umas. 
, ~ td “~ ~ 
Movov adfiws Tov evayyediov Tov Xpio-rov 27 


vealed in that passage could 
scarcely be applied to the qua- 
lity or principle of faith, but are 
quite suitable to the Gospel as a 
system of faith. 

26. That your glorying] 
Quite literally, that your subject 
of glorying (the Gospel and all 
that it gives you of peace and 
strength) may abound (may have 
continual increase and overflow 
in your happy experience) in 
Christ Jesus (in whom alone we 
can have any good thing) a me 
(as its human channel of com- 
munication to you) through my 
presence again with you. All 
this fulness and exactness of 
meaning can scarcely be given 
in the rendering. 

27—30. ‘Only live as you 
ought your heavenly citizenship. 
Present or absent, let me have 
you such as I would. Stand 
fast in one spirit. The Gospel 
is struggling—be of one mind in 
helpingit. Have no panic fears 
of human opponents. To oppose 
the Gospel is to fight against 
God. To be on the side of the 
Gospel is a warrant of salvation, 


To suffer for Christ is God’s 
choice gift to you. You saw, 
you hear of, my conflict—it is 
yours too.’ 

27. Only] For this alone 
is of vital moment, All else is 
circumstantial, this is essential. 
My continuance in life, my pre- 
sence with you, is secondary 
and subordinate to this. 

LInwe your citizenship] It 
is one word in the Greek, and 
this is its proper meaning. In 
Acts xxiii. 1 (the other place of 
its occurrence in Scripture) it 
may be less suitable to render 
it so exactly, for St Paul is there 
addressing a Jewish audience, to 
which the mention of his Roman 
citizenship would not be appro- 
priate, and the addition of the 
words unto God seems to show 
that that thought was not in 
his mind. But the Philippians 
were proud of their Roman citi- 
zenship, and St Paul may well 
remind them of a higher and 
nobler. Compare ili. 20, and 
the note there. 

As is worthy| The phrase 
occurs elsewhere in St Paul’s 





40 


TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


. 27 Gospel of Christ; that, whether coming and see- 
ing you, or being stil absent, I may hear of your 
state, that ye stand fast in one spirit, with one 
soul sharing the contest of the faith of the Gospel, 

28 and not scared in any thing by them that oppose 
you; for such opposition is to them a sure proof 
of destruction, but of salvation for you; and this 


Epistles, and with interesting 
variations. Here it is worthily 
of the Gospel. In Rom. xvi. 2, 
worthily of such as are saints, 
Eph. iv. 1, worthily of the calling. 
Col. i. 10, worthily of the Lord. 
1 Thess. ii. 12 (3 John 6), wor- 
thily of God. 

That, whether coming| The 
sentence is not quite complete, 
but it is easy to see how it would 
be made so, The addition of 
the words I may find (after 
seeing you), or the substitution 
of a more general word, such as 
learn, for hear (which suits only 
the second supposition, that of 
his continued absence), would 
make all smooth. In these de- 
partures from strict accuracy of 
style, which are so frequent in 
St Paul’s Epistles, we have an 
interesting reminder of his 
chained arm (in this group of 
letters), as well as of his habi- 
tual use of an amanuensis in 
writing, whether from defective 
sight or other causes. Compare 
Rom. xvi. 22, where the amanu- 
ensis inserts his own greeting; 
2 Thess, iil. 22, where the rule 


of St Paul’s writing is stated; 
and Gal. vi. 11, where an ex- 
ception to that rule will be 
found. 

Stand fast} A favourite 
word of St Paul’s, having some- 
thing of a military tone, found 
first in 1 Thess. iu. 8, for now 
we live, if ye stand fast in the 
Lord. It occurs again in this 
Epistle, iv. 1. 

Sharing the contest of] Li- 
terally, contesting along with 
the faith. The Gospel is repre- 
sented as 4 competitor in an 
athletic contest (a favourite 
figure with St Paul), and the 
Philippians are exhorted to side 
with it in that competition for 
victory (cvvabXovvres TH Tioret). 
Elsewhere the individual Chris- 
tian is the competitor. See 1 
Cor. 1x. 24—27. Phil. ii 12— 
14. The personification here 
of the Gospel seems to illustrate 
that implied in its trial and self- 
defence as explained on verses 
7 and 16. For the expression 
of the text compare Rom. xv, 
30, where St Paul desires the 
Roman Christians to share his 





TIPOS SIAINMHSIOTS. 4! 


g , Vv ’ ‘ VY oe A ~ w 
moNtTever Ge, iva eite EAOwy Kal tdwy vuas etre 1. 27 
\ 4 A A “~ 7 S A 
aTrwy AkKOUW Ta TEDL UMW, OTL OTHKETE Ev Evt 


a ~ ~ ~ ~ rd ~ 
TVEUMATL, [Lia Wuxn cuvabNouvtes TH MOTEL TOU 


9 f 4 \ , 9 A e A 
evayyéeAXiou, Kal pn mwrTupopevoe év pndevi vio 28 


~ 9 / e/ 3 ‘ ] ~ ow ? 
TOV AVTIKELMEVWY" HTIS ETTLV aVTOLS EvOELELS aTTW- 


“~ , 4 ~ A ~ 
Acias, Unwy Sé owTnpias, Kal TovVTO amo OQeov: 


own struggle (cvvaywvicacGai 
pot) in prayer to God. 

The faith of the Gospel] 
Either, the faith belonging to 
(revealed in) the Gospel; or, the 
faith consisting of (which is) the 
Gospel. 

28. Scared] The word 
(3rvpopevor) is peculiar, and no- 
where else used in Scripture. 
It is said to be specially applied 
to the alarm of animals, birds 
or horses, at some fancied dan- 
ger. 
Them that oppose you] 1 
Cor, xvi. 9, and there are many 
adversaries. Sometimes in the 
singular, as 1 Tim. v. 14. 

For such opposition) Liter- 
ally, which, but the sense is 
clearly which opposition, which 
Sact (of their opposing you), is it- 
self the twofold proof spoken of. 
For the thought there is a re- 
markable parallel in 2 Thess. 
i. 5—7, where the fact of being 
persecuted is said to involve the 
same twofold inference of retri- 
bution on the one side and re- 
lief on the other. 

Sure proof| The Greek 
word (évdegis) means manifesta- 


tion or demonstration. It occurs 
also in Rom. iii. 25, 26, and 
2 Cor. viii. 24. In 2 Thess. i. 
5 another form (évéeryna) of the 
same word is used, differing 
from this in being a proof given 
instead of the act of proving. 

Destruction] Here made 
the opposite of salvation; in 
Matt. vii. 13, of life; in Heb. x. 
39, of the saving (or rather gain- 
ang) of the soul. 

But of salvation for you] 
Literally, but of salvation of 
you, the word you standing 
first, for the sake of emphatic 
contrast with them. 

Salvation| Properly a state 
of safety or well-being in all de- 
partments of the life, in body, 
soul, and spirit. But, inasmuch 
as this state has been Jostthrough 
sin, the Scripture context of the 
word (in its full sense) is always 
that of recovery of the well- 
being by redemption, faith, and 
grace. See, for example, Luke 
1.77. Acts xvi. 17. 2 Cor. vi. 2. 
Eph. i. 13. Heb. i. 14. 

And this| For the phrase, 
compare Rom. xiii. 11. 1 Cor. 
vi. 6, 8. Eph. i 8. It adds a 


II. 1 


42 TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


I. 29 from God: for to you it was granted, in behalf of 
Christ—not only to believe in Him, but also to 
30 suffer in His behalf; having the same sort of 
struggle which ye saw in me and now hear of in 


me. 


further thought, giving weight 
and emphasis to a foregoing 
statement. Here, and that too 
a proof not from man but from 
God. 

29. For] JI say, a proof 
From God Himself, because suf- 
Sering such as yours is a special 
boon from Him. 

It was granted| Such is 
the tense in the Greek. It 
seems to date the boon spoken 
of either (1) from God’s eternal 
counsels of love, or else (2) from 
that outpouring of spiritual gift 
on the day of Pentecost which 
is so often represented in Scrip- 
ture as having had in it the 
endowment of the Church and 
the Christian for all subsequent 
time. aster and Pentecost are 
the two Gospel dates. The one 
is the date of grace, the latter 
of gift. The one is the date of 
salvation, the other the date of 
ministry. For the former, see 
1 Pet. i. 3. Col. iti, 1. &c. For 
the latter, Eph. iv. 7—16. 

In behalf of Christ} Again 
there is a broken construction. 
St Paul began to say, To you uz 
was granted (as a special boon) 


to suffer in behalf of Christ. But 


If then there is any encouragement in Christ, 


after writing in behalf of Christ, 
and before adding to suffer, he 
interposes the thoughtof another 
and earlier boon, that of faith 
itself. And then he repeats in 
behalf of Him to repair the 
breach. 

30. The same sort of | Li- 
terally, the same...such as. It 
was not strictly identical; the 
Philippians were not actually 
imprisoned as he was; but their 
struggle was of the same general 
character. 

Struggle] The word (ayuyv) 
is applied to any kind of severe 
effort whether of body or mind, 
specially to those athletic con- 
tests to which there are so many 
allusions in Scripture. Com- 
pare Heb. xii. 1, where the hind 
of contest is defined by the words 
let us run prefixed to it. Else- 
where it is more general. 1 
Thess. ii, 3. 1 Tim, vi 12. 2 
Tim, iv. 7. In Col. i. 1 it is 
the word for St Paul’s wrestling 
in prayer for his converts; pos- 
sibly with allusion to Gen. xxxil. 
24, interpreted by Hos. xii. 4. 

Ye saw in me| When I was 
with you the first time. See 
Acts xvi. 19, &c. 1 Thess. 11. 


—— be 











TIPOS ®IAINMHSIOTS. 43 


e/ re 9 V4 @ A e A ~ 9 s T 
OTL Upiv EexaploGn To uvmEep Xptorov, ov povor lL. 29 


4 9 9 A S 9 A 4 A e A 9 ~ 
TO €lS aAUTOV WioTEvEelY ANAA Kal TO UTED aUTOU 
A 4 a“ V4 a of 
Tacyew Tov avTov dywva ExovTeEs oiov EideTE 30 


> 9 \ \ ~ r) / > 9 , 
EV EMOL KAL VUV QKOVETE EV EMOL,” 


Ei tis ovv mapaxAnots €v Xpiore, ei Te wa- II. 1 


2, having suffered before, and 
been shamefully handled, as ye 
know, at Philippr. 

In me...in me} In my case 
or person. 

IY. r1—11. ‘One word of 
entreaty I have for you. By 
all the deep blessings, comforts, 
and privileges of the Christian 
state, I beseech you to crown 
my joy in you by a life of love 
and unity. Away with parti- 
sanship, and its motive vanity. 
Lay deep in humility the foun- 
dation of peace. Lay it deeper 
still in an absolute unselfish- 
ness—such an unselfishness as 
was in Jesus Christ, who, being 
from eternity in the form of 
God, thought not of that equality 
with Godas giving Him a bound- 
less range of getting and having, 
but, on the contrary, divested 
Himself of all that was His, by 
taking creature-form, by assum- 
ing the human likeness—nor 
rested even there, but carried 
humiliation further still, by an 
obedience which stopped not 


short of death, yea, a death of 


uttermost pain and shame, the 
death of the cross, In reward 
of this humiliation, and propor- 


tioned to it, was that exaltation 
to a name above every name, 
in virtue of which every knee 
throughout God’s universe shall 
bend in worship and homage in 
the name of Jesus, and every 
tongue tell out the great con- 
fession that JesusChrist is Lord, 
to the glory of God the Father.’ 

IJ. 1. Lf then thereis| Such 
is the form of expression. (Com- 
pare iv. 8, of there 1s any virtue, 
dc.) So surely as there is any 
grace or any blessing in the Gos- 
pel, I beseech you, &c. In other 
words, J beseech you then by all 
the grace and blessing which is in 
the Gospel. 


Encouragement] This great 


Gospel word (zapaxAyots) is ge- 
nerally said to have two distinct 
senses, exhortation and consola- 
tion. But in fact the two meet 
in encouragement. On the one 
hand it never means cold or bare 
exhortation; on the other it 
never means mere soothing. 
It is always sympathetic, and 
it is always animating. It is 
cheering on. It is the call of 
the general who heads, sword 
in hand, the army which he 
would incite to bravery. The 





a 


44, TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


II. 1 if any comfort of love, if any partnership in the 
2 Spirit, if any affections and compassions, fulfil ye 
my joy, that ye be of the same mind, having the 
same love, knit together in soul, of one mind; 
3 doung nothing in a spirit of partisanship, nor in 
a spirit of vainglory, but in the lowliness of your 
mind accounting each other better than your- 
4selves; not looking each of you at your own 


word encouragement (which is, 
by derivation, putting the heart 
anto another) seems to be a fair 
summary of the contents of the 
Greek word. Son of encourage- 
ment (Acts iv. 36) is no dis- 
paraging title for Barnabas, who 
(Acts x1. 23) when he came to 
Antioch, and had seen the grace 
of God, was glad, and encou- 
raged them all that with purpose 
of heart they would cleave to the 
Lord. It is not necessary, how- 
ever, to force the one rendering 
upon every passage. Here, we 
need com/ortfor a different Greek 
word in the next clause. 
Comfort| The precise word 
here used (apapvOcov) occurs 
only here in Scripture. With 
another termination (modifying 
comfort into comforting) it 1s 
found in 1 Cor. xiv. 3. 
Parinership in the Spirit] 
Joint participation im (of) the 
Holy Spirit. For the construc- 
tion, see iil. 10, partnership im 
His sufferings. 1 Cor. x. 16. 2 
Cor. viii. 4. For the thought 
(though in that passage both 


words have the definite article) 
see 2 Cor. xiii. 13. 

If any affections| If there 
is amy such thing amongst us as 
Christianaffection and Christian 
compassion. See note on i. 8, 

2. Fulfil] This word, in 
all its forms, is characteristic of 
this group of Epistles, and may 
perhaps indicate a growing sense 
in the writer of the capacities 
and capabilities of the Gospel. 

Fulfil ye my joy| As though 
there were just this wanting to 
his perfect happiness, The in- 


ference of a supposed want of 


unity in the Philippian Church 
may be too roughly and coarse- 
ly drawn, but it is true that the 
only hint of imperfection lies in 
this direction. See note on i. 
7, You all, kc. 

That ye be] The Greek ex- 
presses this as the object of his 
Injunction, im order that ye may 
be, whereas our idiom would sug- 
gest rather, by beng. See note 
on i. 9. 

Of the same mind| In the 
four nearly equivalent phrases 




















IPOS SIAINMHSIOTS. 4s 


, 5) V4 wv , , f 
papufiov ayarmns, et Tis Kowwvia mvevpatos, et II. 1 
, A , 
Tis omAayXva Kai OLKTIPMOl, TANPWOATE jov 2 
| a e/ \ A ~ A 
Tv xXapav, iva TO avTo hpovnre, Thy avTny 
> , 4 / 1 aA ~ 
dyarnv ExovTes, Tuvuxol, TO Ev PpovouvTes: 
A 5) ‘ A 
pndev kar’ éoBeiav nde Kata Kevodociav, dAda 3 
TH Tamewoppoovvn aAANAoOUS tjryoumEvoL U7Ep- 
: poo” Y Pp 


, “~ \ a e/ 
EXovTas €avTwWY' Mn Ta EavTwWY EKaTTOL OKO- 4 


which follow, a climax may be 
faintly traced from the same 
thing in the first to the one thing 
in the fourth. But this is pre- 
carious, and we are safer in 
regarding the multiplication of 
expressions as due rather to ‘the 
tautology of earnestness.’ 

Knit together in sowl] An 
attempt is made by this render- 
ing (not wholly satisfactory) to 
distinguish the with of the Greek 
(ovvyrvyxor) from the sume of the 
two preceding clauses and the 
one of the following. 

Of one mind] The exact 
phrase is found only here. 

3. Doing nothing) This 
might be taken, with the A uthor- 
ized Version, as a new sentence, 
Do nothing. But the participle 
best suits the following clauses 
(accounting...looking, &c.). 

In a spirit of | Literally, 
according to; that is, by the rule 
of, on a principle of, kc. 

Partisanship] See note on 
i, 17. 

Vainglory| The substantive 
is found here only in Scripture, 


and the adjective only in Gal. 
v. 26. In both places the con- 
nexion of vanity with discord is 
strikingly shown. 

But wn the lowliness of your 
mind| Literally, by your low- 
lymindedness. As vanity is 
one of the two roots of discord, 
the other being selfishness, so 
humility (a low estimate of one- 
self) is one of the two secrets of 
unity, the other being self-fur- 
getfulness. Compare Rom. xii. 
10, tr honour preferring one 
another (literally, accounting one 
another before yourselves). 

4. Looking at] Making 
them your mark or aim. The 
word is that of 2 Cor. iv. 18, 
while we look not at the things 
which are seen, dc. The root of 
the word is that mark (cxozds) 
which guides the course of the 
runner (ill. 14). For the sense 
compare 1 Cor. x. 24, let no one 
seek that which is his own, but 
every one that which is his neigh- 
bour’s interest. 

Each of you...each of you] 
The each is plural (twice) in the 


46 TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


II. 4 things, but each of you also at the things of 


5 others. 


Have this mind in you which was also 


6in Christ Jesus; who, subsisting in the form of 
God, counted not as a means of gain the being 
7 equal with God, but made Himself empty, taking 


revised text. This in Classical 
Greek would mean, each set of 
you; each little section into 
which you may be divided, by 
birth, choice, or accident, by 
family, acquaintance, society, 
&c. And this tinge of meaning 
seems quite suitable here. 

Things...things| Tnterests, 
wishes, feelings, dc. 

5. Have this mind] More 
exactly, have this thing for your 
mind (your principle of thought 
and feeling) in your case, which 
was (or 18) also had for His mind 
(His principle of thought and 
feeling) inthe caseofChrist Jesus. 

This} An entire and abso- 
lute self-forgetfulness, 

Which was also] Or, which 
is also. Is not the same mind in 
Him still ? 

6. Subsisting| In so im- 
portant a passage accuracy is 
more vital than beauty of ren- 
dering, and a somewhat formal 
and metaphysical term may be 
acquiesced in for its fidelity to 
the Greek. We have in this 
passage three words for exis- 
tence, to be (elvar), to be before- 
hand (virapxewv), to begin to be 
(yiverOa), and the variation is 
not accidental. Z'o subsist (vrap- 


xev) is to be beforehand, to be 
to begin with, to be by nature or 
originally, If the word says 
slightly less than John i. 1 (in 
the beginning was), it is at least 
entirely in harmony with it, and 
asserts preexistence if not (in so 
many words) eternal existence. 
The condition which was the 
basis and substratum of all else 
was @ prior existence in the form 
of God. 

The form of God] Three 
words occur in this passage ex- 
pressive of the general idea of 
resemblance, form (uop¢y), fa- 
shion (oxynpa.), likeness (oproiwpa.). 
The first alone is applicable to 
God, for it alone has the sense, 
not of externalappearance, but of 
essential quality. Fora full ac- 
count of the words I must refer 
to Bishop Lightfoot on this pas- 
sage, and to Archbishop Trench’s 
Synonymsofthe NewTestament. 

Counted not as} In the in- 
terpretation of this difficult 
phrase there are two main lines 
of divergence. 1. The Autho- 
rized Version, with its render- 
ing, thought it not robbery, makes 
the clause refer to the preex- 
astent Christ; He counted it no 
grasping, no assumption of that 


TIPOS ®IAITIMHSIOTS. 


~ 9 ‘ 4 A e Ld TA 
movuyTes, a@\Aa Kal Ta ETEMWY EKAO TOL. 


47 


Touro LI. 


~ ~ 3 ~ ~ A 9 
dpovetre év Uuiv 6 Kai év Xpiate@ "Incov- os ev 6 


woppy Oot vrapxwv oly dpraypydy irynoaro 


> “~ A \ 7 A 
TO civat ina Oew, ddda EavTov éxevwoev pwopgny 7 


which was not His right, to be 
equal with God—nevertheless 
He divested himself of that 
glory. Three objections lie a- 
gainst this: (1) the aorist tense 
of the verb (7yyoar0), which is 
unsuitable to a habitual state of 
mind, and suggests rather a par- 
ticular mental act; (2) its being 
a verb at all, when the participle 
(and thinking i no robbery) 
would have been a far more na- 
tural mode of expression; (3) 
the emphasis thus laid upon a 
thought least of all appropriate 
to the designed moral, which is 
not that of self-assertion but of 
self-abnegation. 2. The Re- 
vised Version, on the contrary, 
renders it thought vt not a prize 
(with the margin, ‘Greek, a 
thing to be grasped’), thus mak- 
ing this clause the transition 
from the preexistence to the 
humiliation. I have just so far 
modified this view as to make 
the word (dp7ayyos) not a thing 


to be grasped but an act or means | 


of grasping, and to understand 
the exact thought to be, that 
He who was from eternity in 
the form of God, instead of re- 
garding that equality with God 
as giving Him an unbounded 
power of self-aggrandisement, 


did on the contrary empty Him- 
self of all by a voluntary self- 
incorporation with the creature, 
and with the creature not in its 
greatness but in its littleness, not 
in its conditions of comfort and 
honour, but in its uttermost a- 
basement of shame and suffer- 
ing. Thus (1) we preserve the 
exact sense of the precise form 
of the principal word (apmraypos 
not dpraypa), and (2) we avoid 
the appearance of a disparage- 
ment by Christ Himself of His 
own equality with God (counted 
at not a prize to be on an equal- 
ity with God). 

The being equal] The form 
of the Greek is the being equal 
things (neuter plural) with God. 


‘A passage in the Septuagint 


(Job xi. 12) is quoted to show 
that no real difference is made 
by this peculiarity (such as 
should make it necessary to 
render the phrase here to have 
equality of beng with God), while 
possibly the more obvious form 
(masculine singular) might have 
seemed to involve a risk of ‘di- 
viding the substance’ of the 
Godhead. 

7. But made Himself empty] 
Instead of filling, He emptied. 
Instead of taking to Himself 


48 


TO THE PHILIPPIANS: 


II. 7 the form of a servant, being born in the likeness 
8 of men; and, being found in fashion as a man, 


made Himself lowly, 


(as the equality with God would 
have enabled Him to do with- 
out stint or limit) He put 
' away and put off from Himself. 
Leaving us an example. 

Empty| The figure is that 
of empty-handed, destitute of 
possession. Ruth i, 21, J went 
out full, and the Lord hath 
brought me home again empty. 
Mark xii. 2, 3, that he might 
receive from the husbandmen of 
the fruit of the vineyard: and 
they...sent hum away empty. 
Luke i. 53, the rich He hath 
sent empty away. For the idea 
of the text compare 2 Cor. 
viii. 9, though He was rich, 
yet for your sakes He became 

oor. 

Taking the form] Literally, 
having taken. The assumption 
of human form is conceptionally 
prior to, and the means of, the 
self-emptying. 

Taking| The figure is that 
of taking into the hand for use 
or equipment. John xiii. 12, 
When He had...taken His gar- 
ments. 

The form of a servant] The 
word form (see note on verse 6) 
is applied both to the divinity 
and to the humanity of Christ. 
Not so the word fashion, which 
can only be used of the hu- 
manity (verse 8). 


becoming obedient, even 


A servant] Literally, a slave. 
But this not in relation to men 
but to God. Christ was a free 
man. In this one respect He 
did not take our nature in its 
lowest level of degradation. It 
was necessary for His ministry 
that He should be personally 
free. Also slavery is an unna- 
tural condition, and therefore 
unsuitable to Him who took 
upon Him our nature in its 
truth not in its unrealities. But 
in relation to God creatureship 
is servitude. Of Him and 
through Him and to Him are » 
all things. 

Being born] This clause is 
strictly parallel and equivalent 
to the preceding. In other 
words, being born in the likeness 
of men. 

Born| Literally, having be- 
come, having begun to be. The 
preexistent Christ enters upon a 
new being by Incarnation. He 
begins to be in a likeness which 
was not His before. The word 
born is adopted from the English 
Version (both Authorized and 
Revised) of the same word in 
Gal. iv. 4, born of a woman, 
born under (the) law. It is too 
definite, but seems preferable to 
the made which appears to be 
practically the only alterna- 
tive, 





TIPOS PIAIMMHZIOTS. 


49 


/ , , , , ‘ 
dovAou AaBuv, év Guowpare dvOowmwv yevopuevos’ II. 
e # ’ / 
kai oxnuate evpeOeis vis avOpwros éTareivwoev 8 
| 4 , 4 / , 
€avTov yevopevos Unkoos mex pt GavaTou, Oavarou 


Iikeness| Rom. viii. 3, God 
sending His own Son in the 
likeness of sinful flesh, dc. 

Of men| Of mankind. 

8. And, being found] A 
further stage of the humiliation 
begins here. He might have 
condescended to take our nature, 
and yet, in doing so, He might 
have stipulated for a condition 
of wealth and honour; He might 
have made the original equality 
with God a means of gain (ap- 
maypos) at least in this, that He 
should take our nature at its 
best, not at its worst. By not 
doing so, He humbled Himself 
over again. 

Found] The word properly 
implies a previous search or en- 
quiry, but often loses that pre- 
cision in its use. TZ'aken cognt- 
zance of, presented to view. See 
for example Luke xvii. 18, there 
were not found that returned to 
give glory to God. Acts v. 39. 
2 Cor. v. 3. 

In fashion] See note on 
verse 6. This word (cyyjua), 


unlike that rendered form (op-— 


$7), has always the idea of 
something sensible, material, or 
circumstantial, and in reference 
to the humanity of Christ dis- 
tinguishes the accidental in it 
from the permanent. The only 
other place of its occurrence in 


V. P. 


Scripture is 1 Cor. vii 31, the 
Fashion of this world passeth 
away. Fora verb derived from 
it see ili, 21, and the note 
there. 

Asaman| That is, such in 
all points as a human being is. 
Heb. ii. 17, 2t behoved Him to 
be made in all things like unto 
His brethren. 

Made Himself lowly] Bothin 
character and in circumstance. 
Matt. xi 29, J am meek and 
lowly (ramewvos) in heart. 

Becoming| Literally, hav- 
ing become, See note on verse 7, 
Taking the form. The obedience 
is conceptionally prior to, and the 
condition of, the humbling. 

Becoming obedient] Not as 
though from a prior opposite or 
different state. Compare Heb. 
v. 8, yet learned He obedience 
by the things which He suffered. 
The thoughtis, thedevelopement 
of the spirit of obedience (which 
was always His) in a series of 
acts. 

Obedient] It is left to be 
understood to whom. Just 80 
St Paul in Rom. vi. 16 uses 
obedience (without further ex- 
planation) as the opposite of sin. 
His servants ye are, whom ye 
obey ; whether of sin, unto death ; 
or of obedience, unto righteous- 
ness. 


4 


50 TO THE PHILIPPIANS, 


II. 9 unto death, yea, the death of the cross. 


Where- 


fore God also highly exalted Him, and granted 
to Him the name which is above every name; 
10 that in the name of Jesus every knee might bend, 


Even unto death} In the 
Authorized Version obedient 
unto death might easily be mis- 
understood. The insertion of 
even in the Revised ought to 
obviate this. Obedient (to the 
Father's will) to the very extent 
of dying. Beyond that limit 
obedience cannot go. Greater 
love, greater devotion, hath no 
man than this, that he lay down 
his life for its object (John xv, 


13), 

Yea, the death of the cross] 
More exactly, and (that death) a 
death of (belonging to, caused by) 
across. The absence of the de- 
finite article in the Greek lays 
the stress upon the kind of death, 
so ignominious, so _ torturing. 
The word itself (cravpds) origi- 
nally meant only an upright 
stake such as palisades are made 
of, and even as an instrument 
of punishment was not confined 
to what we understand by cru- 
cifixion. (In Esther vii. 9 the 
Septuagint renders Let him be 
hanged thereon by the Greek for 
Let him be crucified thereon.) But 
its use in the New Testament is 
uniform, involving all the feel- 
ings of natural disgust and horror 
connected with a Roman cruci- 
fixion, as well as the patriotic 


resentment of it as one of the 
most odious badges of a foreign 
yoke. It may be worth no- 
ticing that our Lord used the 
figure of bearing the cross as the 
duty of the true disciple (Matt. 
x. 38) even before He foretold 
His own death by crucifixion 
(Matt. xx. 19). The force of 
the text, which lies in the de- 
grading character of the death, 
is seen in such passages as I 
Cor. i. 23, Christ crucified, to the 
Jews a stumblingblock (cxavia- 
Aov). Gal. v. 11, the stumbling- 
block of the cross. Heb. xii. 2, 
endured a cross, despising shame. 
While the more attractive aspect 
is shown in Eph. ii. 16. Col. 1. 
20, having made peace through 
the blood of H1s cross. 

9. Wherefore} As the re- 
ward of this uttermost self- 
humiliation. Compare Heb. xii. 
2, who for the joy that was set 
before Him. 

Highly exalted Him| One 
of St Paul’s strong compounds 
with the preposition over (u7ép), 
Like, we are more than conquer- 
ors (Rom. viii. 37). Grace did 
much more abound (Rom, v. 20). 
Explained by Eph. i. 20, &c. 
He raised Him from the dead, 
and set Him at His own right 





TIPOS: SIAIMMHSIOTS. 61 
~ e > \ e , 
S€ oravpov. 10 Kai 6 Oeos avtoy Umepu\woer, II. g 
9 5) ~ 2 e \ “~ 4 
Kal éyapioaTo avTw TO dvoua TO UTEp TaVv bvo- 
e 9 ~ a “~ , 
pa: iva év To dvopatt Incov mav youu kauyn 10 


hand in the heavenly places above 
all rule and authority and power 
and dominion, é&c. 

Granted] Gave as a free 
gift. See i. 29. The word 
(xapi€ec Oat) is peculiar in Scrip- 
ture to St Luke and St Paul. 

The name| We are not to 
Imagine one particular name 
(such as Jesus, or even Lord) to 
be intended. The name is the 
summary of the person, it is that 
expedient by which we repre- 
sent to ourselves and to others 
a person such as He is in form, 
feature, character, &c. Name, 
in Scripture, has very sacred 
applications. The great passage 
is Exod. xxxiv. 5, &c., where 
the name of the Lord is the enu- 
meration of His attributes, and 
is made equivalent to God such 
as Hews, Thus in the Lord’s 
Prayer, Hallowed be Thy name 
is a@ petition that God may be 
regarded and treated as that 
Holy Person which He indeed 
is. In the text the name given 
to Christ is the designation or 
description of Him in His com- 
pleteness, as the crucified and 
glorified Saviour, in whom dwell- 
eth all the fulness of the God- 
head bodily (Col. ii. 9). The 
expression is equivalent to the 
more general terms of 1 Pet. i. 


21 (raised Him up from the 
dead, and gave Him glory) and. 
Heb. ii. 9 (for the suffering of 
death crowned with glory and 
honour). 

Above every name] Above 
every designation or description 
of created being, human or super- 
human, Eph. i. 21, every name 
that is named, not only in this 
world, but also in that which is 
to come (in that world of spirit 
and heaven, of which the full 
disclosure waits for the Advent 
of Christ). 

10. That wn the name of 
Jesus} Not at the name. That 
in the name of Jesus—within 
(and not apart from or indepen- 
dently of) the revealed being (in 
person, work, office, and mind) 
of Jesus—every knee might bend, 
whether in submission, worship, 
or prayer. A magnificent ampli- 
tude is thus given to the divine 
purpose in the exaltation of the 
risen Lord. He is the Person 
who comprehends and contains 
in Himself all the worship as well 
as all the life of God’s universe, 

Every knee might bend] 
Three thoughts are here, as above 
indicated. (1) Submission ; 
Isai. xlv. 23, I have sworn by 
myself...that unto me every knee 
shall bow. (2) Worship; 1 


4—2 


IT. 


52 


TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


10 of beings in heaven and on earth and under the 
I1 earth, and every tongue make confession that 
Jesus Christ is Lord, to the glory of God the 


Father. 
12 


Therefore, my beloved, even as ye always 


obeyed, so, not as if in my presence only, but 
now much more in my absence, work out your 
13 own salvation with fear and trembling; for it is 


Chron. xxix. 20 (Septuagint), 
they bowed ther knees, and wor- 
shipped the Lord, and the king. 
(3) Prayer; Eph. iii. 14, J bow 
my knees unto the Father...that 
He may grant you, &c. 

Of beings] Or, of things. 
The Greek is ambiguous. The 
context seems to suggest per- 
sons rather than things, and the 
passage in Rev. v. 13 is of too 
poetical and pictorial a character 
to be pressed to a decision of the 
question of gender here. 

Under the earth| In Hades, 
the conceived abode of departed 
spirits. Psalm lxili. 9, they shall 
go under the earth. Luke xxiii. 
43. Rev. i. 18, I am alive for 
evermore, Amen; and have the 
keys of death and of Hades. 

11. And every tongue| A 
continuation of the quotation 
begun in verse ro from Isai. xlv. 
23, Unto me every knee shall 
bow, every tongue shall swear. 

Make confession| The word 
(€£ouoroyetoGat) is used both in 
the sense of confession of sin, as 
in Matt. iii. 6. Acts xix. 18. 


James v. 16; and (which is more 
suitable here) of the acknow- 
ledgment in grateful praise of 
what God is. See Matt. xi. 25. 
Luke x. 21. Rom. xv. 9. 

Jesus Christ is Lord| Here 
there could be no question as to 
the rendering, though in the 
Greek order Lord stands first. 
In some like passages the dis- 
tinction of subject and predicate 
is not so clear. Rom. x. 9, tf 
thou shalt confess with thy mvuth 
Jesus as Lord. 2 Cor. iv. 5. 
Compare 1 Cor. xii. 3. 

T'o the glory of God| This 
is the ultimate object of all. 
See 1 Pet. i. 21, who through 
Him are believers wn God, that 
raised Hum from the dead, and 
gave Him glory; so that your 
faith and hope might be in God. 


Rom. x1. 36. 
12—18. ‘Listen, beloved, 
to the word of exhortation. 


Let my absence itself plead with 
you. Inearnest reverence work 
out your salvation—not as left 
to yourselves to do it, but know- 
ing that it is God who works in 


TIPO>, SIAITIMTHZIOTS. 53 


3 V4 \ » , A , 4 
éovpaviwy Kal émiyetwv Kat KataxOoviwv, xa II. 


~ ~ 9 , e/ , 
waca yAwooa €EoMoAOyHnoONTAat OTt Kuptos 
"Inoous Xptoros eis Sofav Ocou Maroos. 

p p 


e A 7 
‘Qore, ayanrntroi pou, Kabws wavtore virn- 12 


, \ ~ / , 
KOUTATE, MN Ws EV TH Tapovcia pov jovor, 


5) A a ~ ~ “A , 
a\\a vuv 7oAAw paddov év TH arrovala pov, 


A / \ , A e ~ / 
pera oBouv Kai Tpouov THv éavTwV GwTNplav 


you first to will and then to 
work. Put away from you dis- 
sensions, secret and open. Be 
what children of God ought to 
be, blameless and innocent, in 
the sight of a world that sorely 
needs the hght of such an ex- 
ample, the presentment of such 
a Gospel. Let me have where- 
of to glory in the day of Christ 
—the proof of no fruitless toil, 
of no disappointed effort. Then, 
though my life-blood may soon 
be demanded as the consumma- 
tion of a life-long sacrifice, I 
can still rejoice, I can still share 
your joy—be that joy yours also, 
in itself, and in its sympathy 
with mine.’ 

12. Therefore] Literally, so 
that. The result of all which is 
this—the duty of earnestness in 
working out in the individual 
life so great salvation. 

My beloved| The exact 
phrase is used by St Paul only 
in 1 Cor. x. 14 besides, 

Obeyed| Not have obeyed ; 
for the. next words show that 
St Paul’s thoughts are going 


back to the time of his own 
presence with them. 

Not as of m| That is, not 
as af you were obedient only in 
my presence. Not as if your 
obedience depended upon my 
being present. 

Work out your own salva- 
tion| The salvation has not to 
be earned, but it has to be 
wrought out. It has to be work- 
ed from and worked upon. Com- 
pare John vi. 27, where the 
literal rendering would be, work 
not the food which perisheth, but 
work the food which abideth 
unto life eternal (make it the 
subject-matter of your working). 
This is the aspect of salvation 
for stemulus, as another aspect is 
for comfort. Thus salvation itself 
may be spoken of as either past, 
present, or future, according as 
redemption, grace, or glory is 
the point of view. Compare 
Rom. viii. 24. Eph. ii. 5, 8. 1 
Cor. xv. 2. Rom. v. 9, Io. 

With fear and trembling| 
The precise expression occurs 
three times in St Paul’s Epistles. 


7 


If. 


54 


TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


13 God that worketh in you both to will and to 


14 work in behalf of His good pleasure. 


Do all 


15 things without murmurings and disputings; that 
ye may be blameless and innocent, children of 
God without blemish amidst a crooked and 


In 2 Cor. vii. 15 he applies it 
to the reception of Titus at Co- 
rinth at a critica] and hazardous 
moment. In Eph. vi. 5 he bids 
Christian slaves to obey their 
masters with fear and trembling. 
As there he would not recom- 
mend an abject or cringing 
spirit, so here he does not pre- 
scribe a timid or depressed habit 
of mind, but only an alert and 
sensitive desire to make the call- 
a and election sure (2 Pet. i. 
10). 

13. or it 18 God] <A re- 
markable and instructive for. 
Work, for God works in you. 
It is thus that Scripture com- 
bines the two opposite truths, 
of grace and free will. Mark 
xvi. 4, when they looked, they 
saw that the stone was rolled 
away, for rt was very great. 

Worketh in you...to work] 
This striking combination is 
lost in the Authorized Version, 
which renders this one Greek 
word (évepyetvy) by two English 
ones, worketh in you...to do. 
Compare Heb. xiii. 21, where 
in the same way the word do 
(wrovetv) occurs twice, make you 
perfect in every good thing to do 
His will, doing in us that which 


as well-pleasing in His sight. 

In behalf of His good plea- 
sure] This may best be taken 
with the words immediately pre- 
ceding. Both to will and to 
work in behalf of (so as to pro- 
mote and accomplish) His good 
pleasure. Christian conduct in 
both its parts, will and act, 
purpose and performance, has 
for its object the carrying out 
of God’s good pleasure. See 2 
Thess. i. 11, we pray always 
for you, that our God may..ful- 
Sul every good pleasure of good- 
ness (may fulfil in you each par- 
ticular of that goodness in which 
He 18 well pleased). 

14. Do all things} The 
call is to (1) a contented and 
cheerful, (2) a peaceable and 
friendly life. Each of the two 
words which follow has both of 
these aspects. 

Murmurings| The word 
(yoyyvopes) expresses all man- 
ner of smothered or half-uttered 
complaints (grumblings) whether 
against God or man. Its first 
occurrence in the Septuagint 
(Exod. xvi. 7) combines both: 
He heareth your murmurings a- 
gainst the Lord; and what are 
we, that ye murmur against us? 


TIPO? SIAINNHSIOTS. 55 


KatepyacecOe* Oeds yap éotw o évepyov év viv IT. 
kat To OéNev Kat TO évepyelv Vireo THs EvooKias. 
TWavTa TWoUlTE ywpis yoyyvouwv Kai Siadro- 14 
yiouov, iva yevnobe aueurro Kat dképatot, 15 
Téxva Ocov auwua Mécov yeveads OKOALaS Kal 


Matt. xx. 11, they murmured 
against the goodman of the house. 
Luke v. 30. John vi. 43. Acts 
vi. 1. x Cor. x. 10. Jude 16, 
these are murmurers, complain- 
ers, &c. 

Disputings| The exact ren- 
dering of the word (Stadoyiopoé) 
would be divided or diverse 
reasonings. These, if silent, are 
doubts; if uttered, are disputes. 
In some places the context gives 
the former sense, in others the 
latter. Thus (1) Luke xxiv. 38, 
why do doubts arise in your 
heart? (2) 1 Tim. ii. 8, without 
wrath and dispute. The second 
of the two senses predominates 
in the text. 

15. That ye may be] This 
is one of many cases in which a 
servile rendering would give 
become instead of be, but with 
loss rather than gain to the 
sense. There is no intimation 
of any special present defect in 
the persons addressed. The 
sense is, that ye may be in the 
result (whatever you are now). 


In fact all that is essential in ~ 


the become, or come to be, of the 
Greek is implied in the combi- 
nation that ye may. 


Innocent] From the literal 
sense of without admixture, as 
wine or metal, the word (ake- 
pasos) comes to mean simple, 
guileless, innocent in character. 
In the two other places of its 
occulrence in Scripture it stands 
in contrast (yet in combination 
also) with the two words for 
wise, Matt. x. 16, wise (ppovipor) 
as serpents, andharmless as doves. 
Rom. xvi. 19, wise (cogpovs) unto 
that which 18 good, and simple 
unto that which 18 evil. 

Without blemish| This is a 
word of frequent occurrence in 
the Septuagint Version of Le- 
viticus and Numbers (first in 
Exod. xxix. 1) in connexion 
with the choice of victims for 
sacrifice, and the idea is pro- 
bably always discernible in its 
higher application in the Psalms 
and in the New Testament. 
Eph. i. 4. v. 27. Col.i.22. Heb. 
ix. 24, who through the eternal 
Spirit offered Himself without 
blemish unto God. 1 Pet.i. 109, 
as of a lamb without blemish 
and unthout spot. Rev. xiv. 5. 

A crooked and perverse gene- 
ration| The expression comes 
from the song of Moses, Deut. 


II. 


56 TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


15 perverse generation, amongst whom ye appear 
16 a8 lights in the world, presenting a word of life, 
that I may have whereof to glory in the day of 
Christ, that I ran not in vain, nor in vain laboured. 
17 Nay, if I am even poured as a drinkoffering upon 


xxxil. 5 (Septuagint). (1) Crook- 
ed is the opposite of straight 
(Luke iii. 5, from Isai. xl. 4), 
and so, morally, it is the oppo- 
site of straightforward, right- 
minded, upright, &c. Acts ii. 40, 
save yourselves from this crooked 
generation. 1 Pet. ii. 18, not 
only to the good and gentle, but 
also to the froward (crooked). 
(2) Perverse is literally distorted 
(as eyes, limbs, &c.), and easily 
passes into the sense of a twist 
or obliquity in the mental and 
moral being. Matt. xvii. 17, 
O faithless and perverse genera- 
tion. Acts xx. 30, speaking 
perverse things. 

Yeappear| Or, appear ye; 
I would have you (ye ought) to 
appear. ‘The mood of the verb 
is ambiguous (indicative or im- 
perative). The voice (daiverbe, 
not daivere) does not admit the 
rendering to shine (John i. 5. 
1 John ii, 8. &.), but is that of 
Matt. 11. 7 (the time of the star 
that appeared). xxiv. 30 (then 
shall appear the sign of theSon of 
Man in heaven). The Christian 
example is represented in the 
text as a sort of appearance of 
a new luminary in the heaven 
of mankind. 





Lnghts| Luminartes, givers 
of light. The word (dworyp) 
occurs but twice in the New 


’ Testament; here, and in Rev. 


xxi. 11, her light (the luminary 
of her, the light which she gave) 
was like unto a stone most pre- 
cious. In the Septuagint it is 
the word used in Gen. 1 14, 16, 
Let there be lights...God made 
two great laghts. 

In the world| The absence 
of the definite article in the 
Greek gives the sense tn @ 


(whole) world. It has the effect _ 


of emphasizing the greatness of 
the sphere in which the Chris- 
tian influence is to act. Soin 
Rom. iv. 13. xi. 12, 15. 2 Cor. 
v. 19. The world (xédopos) in 
St Paul’s view here is that uni- 
verse of mankind which is as 
yet outside the Gospel. See x 
Cor. xi. 32. Eph.ii2, 12. 1 
John v. 19. 

16. Presenting] The word 
(éréxev) means to hold a thing 
to a person, as a cup of wine to 
a banqueter, or a light to one in 
the dark. The latter may be 
the idea here. The word of life 
is a sort of light held out into 
the darkness of the world for 
the acceptance and comfort of 











TIPO? PIAITIMHSIOTS. 


57 


SteorTpappevns, ev ois haiveobe wis pworripes II. 15 


2 / 4 ~ 9 / 9 , 
éy Koouw, Aoyov Cwns EmrexovTEs, Els Kavynua 16 


? \ > e / ~ ed ) ? \ af 
€uol eis juépav Xptorov, STt ovK eis Kevov Edpa- 


aN ‘ A / 
Mov ovee ets Kevov €xoTriawa. adAAa El Kal o7revoo- 17 


all who will take it. Jn Him 
was life, and the life was the 
light of men (John i. 4). 

A word of life] A divine 
utterance having for tts subject 
and purport life, in the Scrip- 
tural sense of the word life, 
which is, not mere existence, 
but an existence which is (1) 
conscious, (2) satisfying, (3) ever- 
lasting. Johni. 4. iv. 14. v.24, 
40. Vi. 33, 51. X. 10. XVIL 3. Xe, 

That I may have] Literally, 
unto (so as to form) a subject of 
glorying for me unto (against, 
an preparation for) the day of 
Christ. The faithful effort of 
the Philippians in the character 
of Christian luminaries will be 
his glorying in the great day. 
2 Cor. i. 14, we are your glory- 
ung, even as ye also are (or shall 
be) owrs in the day of our Lord 
Jesus. 1 Thess. il. 19, what 28 
our...crown of glorying ? are not 
- even ye, before our Lord Jesus 
at His coming? 

That I ran not] This is 
the sum and substance of that 
which he hopes for as his sub- 
ject of glorying. 

Ran...laboured| The tense 
of the two verbs indicates the 
retrospect of the life as a single 
act from the other side of death, 


For the figure of the runner 
(taken from the foot-race) com- 
pare iii. 14. 1 Cor. ix. 26. Gal. 
li. 2. 2 Tim. iv. 7. 

In vain] Literally, unto 
emptiness; so as to be empty- 
handed at the end of it. 2 Cor. 
vi. 1. Gal. it 2, lest by any 
means I should be running, or 
had run, in vain. 1 Thess. iil. 5. 

17. Nay, | Nay, of I 
not only run and labour but 
even give my very life-blood in 
martyrdom, I not only shall 
have whereof to glory in the great 
day, but even now I rejoice, and 
bid you to rejoice with me. 

If I am even poured| Not 
of I should be, but of I am. 
He speaks of it as a process 
already begun. J am being 
poured. Even if the present 
imprisonment should not end in 
death (see verse 24), still the 
pouring out of the life-blood is 
in course of realization. The 
tense is the same as in 2 Tim. 
iv. 6, when the second imprison- 


‘ment, which did end in death, 


was far on in its course. 
Poured as a drinkoffering| 
The Levitical law required that 
the offering of a certain quan- 
tity of wine should in most cases 
accompany the sacrifice by fire. 


58 TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


II. 17 the sacrifice and ministry of your faith, I joy, and 


18 rejoice with you all. And do ye also have the 
same joy, and the same rejoicing with me. 

19 + But I hope, in the Lord Jesus, to send you 
Timotheus speedily, that 1 also may be of good 


See, for example, Exod. xxix. 
40, 41 (the daily sacrifice at 
morning and evening), Lev. 
XXllL 13, &c. (the feasts of the 
Lord), Num. vi. 17 (the Naza- 
rite’s offering), xv. 4, &c. (free- 
will offerings), xxviii. 10, &c. 
(sabbath, new moons, passover, 
firstfruits), xxix. 6, &. St 
Paul using this figure speaks of 
the pouring of his own blood at 
last upon the life-long sacrifice 
of his ministry for others. 
Upon the sacrifice] Your 
Jaith is the sacrifice spoken of. 
But whereaselsewhere Christians 
are represented as offering their 
own sacrifices, whether general 
ae li. 5), or of the body 
Rom. xii. 1), or specifically of 
praise or almsgiving (Heb. xiii. 
15, 16), here St Paul describes 
himself as offering up the sacri- 
fice of others. Compare Rom. 
Xv. 15, 16, that I should be a 
minister of Christ Jesus unto 
the Gentiles, ministering (in 8a- 
crifice) the Gospel of God, that 
the (my) offering up of the Gen- 
tiles might be acceptable, dc. 
And ministry| This word 
(Aecrovpyia) was appropriated 
in Attic usage to those expen- 
sive public services which the 


richer citizens undertook for the 
benefit or entertainment of the 
people. Itand its cognate forms 
occur about 140 times in the 
Septuagint, and are specially 
applied to the priest/y ministra- 
tions (Exod. xxviii. 35. Deut. x. 
8. 1 Sam. ii. 11. &.). And so 
in most cases of its occurrence 
in the New Testament (where 
it is used fifteen times) a sacred 
if not sacrificial sense prepon- 
derates. Here its combination 
with sacrifice marks this strong- 
ly. St Paul is the officiating 
minister in the offering up of 
the faith of the Philippian 
Church to God. 

I joy, and| First he asserts 
his own joy, and then, in that 
yearning sympathy which re- 
fused the very thought of zsola- 
tion in happiness, he assumes 
their joy, and claims to share it. 
It is the very spirit of the with 
you of 2 Cor. iv. 14. He can 
enjoy nothung alone. 

18. Have the same joy] 
Literally, rejoice the same thing. 
And the same thing is put at 
the beginning of the clause, so 
as to serve as an accusative to 
both the verbs, rejoice and rejoice 
with. The above rendering is 


TIPOS SIAINMHSIOTS. 


59 


~ ~ } 
par éri TH Ovoia Kal NerToupyia THs miorews I.17 
ae = a Vogt 
Uuwv, xalpw Kal cuvyaipw maow vu. TO Oe 18 
a / 
auto Kal Upels yaipeTEe Kal OvvyaipETE pot. 
¢ 9 ~ , , 
"EArriGw dé év Kupiw “Inoot Tyuobeov Tayéws 19 
VA en e/ 9 4 9 - A \ 4 
meurrat vpiv, iva Kayo evry yvous Ta Tepe 


an attempt to express this con- 
struction. (1) Have the same 
joy that I have; and (2) have 
the same fellow-joy with me that 
I have with you. 

_ 19—30. ‘I hope soon to 
send Timothy to Philippi, that 
he may bring me back the com- 
fort of good tidings of you. He 
is the only person, among those 
at this time available, whose 
interest in you is entirely real 
and genuine, Selfishness is 
commoner than devotion—you 
know what he is, a very son to 
me in the service of the Gospel. 
I shall send him, as soon as I 
see what turn my imprisonment 
takes—I trust that I shall my- 
self soon come. Meanwhile I 
despatch Epaphroditus with this 
letter, He knows that you have 
heard of his illness, and he is 
unhappy in the thought of the 
anxiety it must have caused you. 
It was indeed a severe and dan- 
gerous illness, but God, in mercy 
to me as well as to him, has 
raised him from it. The sight 
of him will be joy to you, and 
the thought of your joy will be 
a relief to my sorrows. Sucha 
man deserves your honour: in 


his zeal for Christ’s work, in his 
efforts as your representative in 
my service, he hazarded, and all 
but lost, life itself.’ 

19. In the Lord Jesus] In 
whom I live, and in whom there- 
fore my every hope, about things 
earthly as well as heavenly, is 
conceived and fostered. See 1. 
13, and note there, In Christ. 

To send you Timotheus| 
Such is the English idiom cor- 
responding to the particularform 
of the Greek. Yow is a simple 
dative (meaning for your benefit, 
comfort, &c.), not the unto you 
(zpos vpas) of verse 25. For the 
dative you, compare 1 Cor. iv. 17, 
Jor this cause I sent you Timo- 
theus...who shall remind you, ée. 

I also| Taken literally, it 
would mean J as well as you. 
But this literal sense sometimes 
requires to be modified into J 
on my part. See, for example, 
Eph. 1.15, wherefore I also. Col. 
i. 9, for this cause we also. 

May be of good courage] A 
word (evyvy@) used only here in 
the New Testament. In 1 and 
2 Macc. forms of the same com- 
pound occur in the sense of 
spirit or courage. 


60 


II. 20 courage when I know your state. 


TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


For I have 


no man his equal in soul, one that will have a 


21 true concern for your state. 
22 their own, not the things of Jesus Christ. 


For they all seek 
But 


the proof of him ye perceive in this, that, as 
a child serves a father, so he served with me in 


23 aid of the Gospel. 


Him then I hope to send as 


soon as ever I shall clearly see how it is with me: 
24 and I am persuaded, in the Lord, that I also 
25 myself shall come speedily. But I have thought 


Your state| Literally, the 
things which concern you (ra 
wept vnav). So in the next verse. 
Slight variations of the phrase 
are found in verse 23 (ra wept 
éué) and i, 12 (ra car ee). 

20. 


Paul at this moment. Tuimo- 
theus and Epaphroditus are the 
only two actually named in the 
letter. The strong expression 
of the text may be regarded 
either (1) as not quite literal, or 
else (2) as meaning, no one of 
those who might be at present 
available for the purpose. 

His equal in soul| The 
same word (icdywyxos) occurs 
only here in the New Testa- 
ment, and once in the Septua- 
gint Version of Psalm lv. 13 
(a man mine equal). There is 
one like compound (icoripos, 
equal in value) in 2 Pet. i.1. The 
common rendering, ukeminded, 
exchanges the idea of equality 
for that of sumilarity. 


I have no man| We | 
do not know who were with St. 


True| Genuine, as opposed 
to spurious. Compare iv. 3, true 
yokefellow. 2 Cor. viii. 8, the sin- 
cerity of your love. 1 Tim.1 2, 
my own son. Tit. i. 4. 

21. They all] Under the 
stress of strong emotion, the ge- 
neral is made universal. 

Seek their own| Things; 
interests, comforts, objects. 
Compare 1 Cor. x. 24, let no 
man seck his own, but each his 
neighbour's good. xill. 5, seeketh 
not her own. 2 Cor. xii. 14, [ 
seek not yours, but you. Col. 
ill. 1, seek the things above. St 
Paul’s two characteristic words, 
to seek (€nreiv) and to mind 
(ppovetv), represent severally the 
aim of the life and the spirit of 
the life. 

The things of Jesus Christ] 
His interests, the things which 
He has made His own in ‘tak- 
ing upon Him to deliver man.’ 
Isai. lilt. 10, 11, the pleasure of 
the Lord shall prosper in His 
hand ; He shall see of the travail 


TIPO> ®IAINMHSIOTY. 61 


e ~ 9 a, A wv 3 , e/ , 
VuwV. OUdEva yap Exyw ivovvyor, doris yynoiws IT. 


~ j e 
TA TEP UuwY MEplUYNoEL. Of TavTEs yap Ta 21 


e ~ ~ 9 A ~ 3 ~ 
éavtwv (nTovow, ov ta Xptorov ‘Inco. 


THV 22 


A A ? ~ , e/ e , 
dé OoKiny avTou ywwoKeTe, STL ws TAT PL TEKVOV 


A 9 \ 2? / > \ r) , 
Guy Evol edovAEVaEV Els TO EVayyeXLOY. 


TOUTOV 23 


pev ouv éATriw méuyat ws av addidw ta repl 


20 


> \ ~ / \ 4 ) 
éue Eavtns memoia oe év Kupiw ott Kal avtos 24 © 


4 9 4 
Tayews eAEvoO"al. 


of Hrs soul. ° 

22. The proof of him| That 
is, what he ts you can see by 
this proof, namely, that, de. 2 
Cor. it. 9, that I might know 
the proof of you (that I might 
ascertain by putting you to the 
test) whether ye are obedient. 

That, as a child) St Paul 
was going to write, that, as a 
child serves a father, so he served 
me in the Gospel. But with 
that beautiful courtesy which is 
characteristic of him he avoids, 
when he reaches it, what might 
have seemed to place Timothy 
in too inferior a position to him- 
self, and inserts with before me, 
breaking the construction but 
with admirable effect. 

Served] The word is left 
absolute: did service, it not being 
necessary to say to whom. Com- 
pare Rom. vii. 6, that we should 
serve in newness of spirit. 

In aid of | Literally, unto. 
See i. 5. 

23. Him then| The Greek 
by an anticipative particle (pév) 


dvaykaiov 6€ rrynoapunv 25 


places this verse in contrast with 
the next—Timothy’s coming 
with his own. 

As soon as ever] Literally, 
Sorthuith whensoever ; but forth- 
with stands in the Greek at the 
end of the sentence, and its un- 
avoidable transposition in En- 
glish makes the paraphrase of 
the text all but necessary. 

24. And I am persuaded | 
So little foundation is there in 
St Paul’s own language for the 
idea that this Epistle was writ- 
ten in an unfavourable state of 
his prospects, and for the argu- 
ment founded upon this as to 
its being later in date than the 
other three. The tone is just 
that of Philem. 22. 

In the Lord| See note on 
verse IQ. , 

25. But] Though I pur- 
pose soon to send Timotheus, 
and though I expect soon to 
come myself, yet I cannot post- 
pone for either of these events 
the return of Epaphroditus. 

I have thought) The tense 


62 TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


II. 25 it necessary to send unto you Epaphroditus, my 


brother and fellow-worker and fellow-soldier, and 
moreover your messenger and minister to my 
26 need; seeing that he was longing after you all, 
and in sore trouble because ye had heard that he 
27 was sick. For sick indeed he was, very nigh 
unto death: but God had mercy on him; and not 
on him only, but on me also, that I might not 
28 have sorrow upon sorrow. I have sent him there- 
fore the more eagerly, that seeing him ye may be 


in the Greek is what is known 
as the epistolary sorist (corre- 
sponding to the epistolary im- 
perfect in Latin). The English 
idiom makes this either the pre- 
sent (J think), or the perfect (I 
have thought), but not the pre- 
terite (I thought). 
Epaphroditus| Only known 
from this Epistle. From this 
passage, supplemented by iv. 18, 
we learn that he was a Philip- 
pian Christian, that he had been 
sent by the Church of Philippi 
with supplies for St Paul at 
Rome, and that there, either 
from over-exertion or from ex- 
posure to climate or infection, 
he had a dangerous illness from 
which he had just recovered 
when St Paul wrote. 
Fellow-soldier| This parti- 
cular title is only given else- 
where by St Paul to Archippus 
(Philem. 2). The foregoing 
term fellow-worker is applied in 
other Epistles to Timotheus, 


Titus, Aquila and Priscilla, 
Mark, and others. 

And moreover| After three 
words describing what Epaphro- 
ditus is to him, St Paul turns to 
what he is to the Philippians. 

Messenger] The word apo- 
stle, elsewhere generally distinc- 
tive of the twelve, or of the 
twelve with two(or three) others, 
is here (and in 2 Cor. viii. 23) 
used in the most general sense 
of messenger or delegate. 

Minister] See note on verse 
17, And munstry. The more 
sacred sense of the word (Ace- 
Toupyos) may be said here to be 
merged in the human. And 
yet even the supplies carried by 
Epaphroditus to St Paul are 
called in iv. 18 a sacrifice. 

26. Seeing that] An uns 
usual particle (ézeidy) with St 
Paul, only used by him (besides) 
in the first Epistle to the Corin- 
thians, where it occurs four 
times. 





TIPOS: SIAIMMHSIOTS. 63 


"Erradpocitov tov adeApov Kat ovvepyov «al II. 25 
TwaTpATWOTHY mou Uuwy 6€ amoaToAOY Kal 
AEerToupyov TNS xpetas Mov mremrat mpos Uuas* 
émeon = érrtTroOwy Kal aby- 26 


iY TavTas vUpas 


povey SwoTt rKkovoate Tt Haobevnoev. Kal 27 
‘ 9 , , / 9 \ 
yap no Qevnoev TapamtAnaoov @avarov: adda o 


5) 4 A A Ul A 
Geos nrAenoev avTdoV’ ovK avTOV O€ Movoy, aAAa 


\ 9 Ul e/ A , 9 A a ~ 
K@l EME, tva pn ATHY Et AUTTNY OX. 


o7ou- 28 


, + of > \ e/ QJ 9 A 
SaoTépws ovv Emeurpa avTov, iva idovtes avTov 


He was longing| It may be 
doubted whether the epistolary 
tense here should not be ren- 
dered is rather than was. But 
the English idiom allows some 
laxity. 

Longing after| Or, accord- 
ing to another strongly attested 
reading, longing to see you 
all, 


In sore trouble] A sancti- 
ty is attached to this word 
(adnpovev) by its being only 
used besides (in Scripture) in 
the narrative of the Agony ; 
Matt. xxvi. 37 and Mark xiv. 
33, and began to be...very heavy 
(sore troubled). The probable 
derivation of the word gives the 
idea of a swrfert of grief or other 
emotion. 

Because ye had heard] A 
beautiful example of unselfish 
sympathy ; the more remarkable 
when we remember that the 
Gospel was only about ten years 
old at Philippi. 


27. For...indeed| Literally, 
for also. Not only had you 
heard it, but it was true. 

Very nigh unto] An un- 
usual word (zapamAyovov), mean- 


. ing literally alongside near, so 


near as to be by the very side 
of the thing or person spoken of. 
In Heb, it 14 (the only other 
place of its occurrence in Scrip- 
ture) it is used of the exact 
similarity of our Lord’s bodily 
nature to ours. 

God had mercy on him] So 
natural is St Paul’s language. 
He speaks of a recovery from 
sickness as a mercy, though he 
has said in i. 23 that to depart 
is far, far better. 

28. Ihave sent] Or, I send. 
No doubt Epaphroditus carried 
the letter. 

Eagerly| Luke vii. 4, they 
besought him earnestly. 2 Tim. 
1,17, he sought me duigently. 

Ye may be glad again] Ye 
may recover cheerfulness. The 


III. 1 


64 


TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 
II. 29 glad again, and so I may be less sorrowful. Receive 


him then, in the Lord, with all joy ; and hold such 
30 men in honour; because for the sake of the work 
of Christ he drew nigh even unto death, having 
put his life in jeopardy that he might supply that 


which was lacking on your part in ministering to 


me. 


word again might be taken with 
seeing him, but seems to be more 
expressive in the above con- 
nexion. 

And so I may be] A very 
tender thought. Their recovery 
of cheerfulness, which St Paul 
would picture to himself as the 
consequence of the arrival of 
Epaphroditus at Philippi, would 
mitigate, if it could not heal, 
his own many sorrows. 

29. Receive] Rom. xvi. 2, 
that ye receive her, an the Lord, 
worthily of the saints. The 


other sense of the word (zpoo- 


SéxeoGa), to expect, is more fre- 
quent in Scripture (Mark xv. 
43. Lukeii. 25. Tit. 11. 13. &c.), 
but would be out of place here, 
as the letter and Epaphroditus 
would arrive together. 

In the Lord) As above, i. 
13. lL. 19, 24. 

Such men| 1 Cor. xvi. 16, 
18, that ye also submit your- 
selves to such men...acknouwledge 
then such men. 

In honour| The two senses 
of honour and value often run 


Finally, my brethren, rejoice, in the Lord. 


into one another in this word 
(€yriuos) a8 in its root (Tuy). 
Luke vii. 2, a certain centurion’s 
servant, who was valuable to him 
(or held in honour by him). 1 
Pet. il, 4, 6, 7. Col. ii. 23. 

30. The work of Christ] 
The close of the verse speaks of 
his self-devotion in bringing 
supplies to St Paul, and this 
too might bespoken of as Christ’s 
work. But the expression seems 
rather to point to a more di- 
rect ministry of the Gospel in 
Rome during his stay, in the 
course of which he had fallen 
sick. See note on verse 25, 
Epaphroditus. 

Drew nigh even unto death] 
The Greek is peculiar, Even 
unto is literally wp to, to the 
extent of (péxpt). So that the 
construction would seem to be, 
He drew nigh (death), up to (to 
the very verge of) death itself. 
See note on verse 7, Lven unto 
death, 

Drew nigh...having put| The 
two acts are not contemporane- 
ous. faving put his life in 


TIPO ®IAINTHSIOTS. 


65 


Taw yapnTe kayw dduToTEpos wo. mpoadexeobe IT. 29 
ovv avtov év Kupiw mera mraons yapas* Kal Tous 
To.ovTous évTisous ExeTe* St Sta TO Epyov Kupiov 30 
péexpt Oavarou nyyiwev, mapaBodevaauevos TH 
Wuxi iva dvarAnpwon TO Uuwy voeTepnua THs 


mpos me NetToupyias. 


To Aovrov, adedpot pou, xaipere év Kupiw. IIT. 1 


jeopardy to serve me, he after- 
wards fell into an all but fatal 
sickness. The sickness was sub- 
sequent to, and consequent upon, 
the risk run in St Paul’s service. 
Having put his life in jeo- 
pardy| Literally, having play- 
ed the venturesome man with his 
life. It isa figure drawn from 
games of hazard, the man’s own 
life being in this case the stake. 
The received reading (sapafov- 
Aevoapevos) gave the feebler 
sense of having counselled amiss 
Jor his life. 
That he might supply] First 
by bringing your contributions 
to Rome, and secondly by minis- 
tering personally to me there. 
That which was lacking] 
Literally, your deficiency of (in) 
the ministry to me. No com- 
plaint or blame is involved in 
the expression. It is rather, 
he came to me from you, to do 
in your behalf that which you, 
absent and distant, necessarily 
left undone by yourselves. Com- 
pare 1 Cor. xvi. 17, J rejoice at 
the coming of Stephanas and 
Fortunatus and Achaicus; for 


VP. 


that which was lacking on your 
part they supplied: for they re- 
Sreshed my spirit, and so yours. 

Ministering| See notes on 
verses 17 and 25. 

Ill. 1. ‘My letter draws 
to its close. Its keynote has 
been the duty of joy, and it 
shall be so to the end.’ 

1. Finally] Literally, as 
for that which remains to be 
said. The word marks an ap- 
proach to the end of the letter, 
but not always a very near ap- 
proach, See, for example, 1 
Thess. iv. 1, where thia finally 
opens the fourth chapter out of 
five; and 2 Thess. iii. 1, where 
it begins the third chapter out of 
three. Too much therefore may 
be made of it here as an indica- 
tion of St Paul’s having design- 
ed to close the Epistle at once. 

My brethren| This form of 
address specially belongs to St 
James. St Paul more common- 
ly uses brethren alone. In each 
of the three Epistles, Romans, 
1 Corinthians, and Philippians, 
my brethren occurs twice. 

Rejoice] The same word 


5 


66 


TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 
III, 1 To wiite the same things unto you, to me is hot 


2 irksome, and for you it is safe. Beware of the 


means farewell in 2 Cor. xiii. 
11. But no inference can be 
drawn from the use of it here 
as to a supposed intention of 
closing the letter immediately. 
See iv. 4. 1 Thess. y. 16, 

In the Lord| To be read, as 
often elsewhere, independently 
of the particular word preceding, 
and as a perpetual reminder of 
the all-including Person who is 
the very life itself. See former 
notes on the same (or equivalent) 
words. 

To write the same things] 
To repeat again and again the 
same things. It is not quite 
clear what these are; whether 
the foregoing precept of joy, 
which has been called the key- 
note of the Epistle, or the fol- 
lowing cautions and warnings 
against false teachers. The 
latter reference would be less 
easily understood by the readers, 
the subject having been an- 
nounced by nothing going be- 
fore. On the other hand, the 
word safe (for you vt 18 safe) 
seems to point rather to dangers 
than to comforts. But in fact 

the transition is by no means 
abrupt, from the duty of joy to 
the peril of losing it by a Ju- 
daizing half-gospel. Thus we 
may understand St Paul to have 
both thoughts in his mind when 
he speaks of the same things. 


And thus, instead of imagining 
a breach of continuity at this 
point, a pause, a surprise, and a 
new start, we shall see an en- 
tire coherence and beautiful har- 
mony in the whole structure of 
the Epistle. 

Irksome| In the two other 
places of its use (Matt. xxv. 26 
and Rom. xii. 11) the word 
(dxvynpos) means slothful. And 
so in Acts ix. 38 the cognate 
verb (oxvetvy) is to be tardy. 
Here it has rather the kindred 
idea of wearisome. 

Safe] Elsewhere (1) jirm 
(Heb. vi. 19), and so (2) certain 
(Acts xxi. 34. &c.). Here (like 
the above word) it has from the 
context something of a causative 
sense, (3) conducive to safety. 

2—14. ‘There is one influence 
at work, among you doubtless as 
elsewhere, hostile to Christian 
joy. Beware of it, though it uses 
the plausible talk of God’s law 
and God’s privileged people. We, 
we Christians, are God’s privi- 
leged people; we, whose worship 
is a spiritual worship, whose 
glorying is in Christ alone, who 
renounce all carnal confidence, 
whether of race, work, or ritual. 
In my case, there is material, 
enough and to spare, for the con- 
fidence which yet I renounce. 
Each several boast of the Jew is 
mine in perfection, I am no 


TPO> PIAIIMTHSIOTS. 


: ~ A a ~ 
Ta avta ypade vpivy éuot pév ovK oKvnpov, vuiv IIL. 1 


A 4 
de aapanes. 
, 4 tA 
BAezrere Tous kuvas, 


proselyte, incorporated late in 
life in the commonwealth of 
Israel: race, tribe, parentage— 
Pharisaic orthodoxy, zeal even 
to persecuting, character of 
blameless strictness—all can 
challenge scrutiny. Yet all 
these advantages I have counted 
loss for Christ. Nor these alone, 
but whatsoever else is in the 
eyes of man precious and beau- 
tiful, I not only did, but do, 
count but scum and refuse, for 
the sake of one thing more ex- 
cellent—the knowledge of Christ 
Jesus my Lord, for whose sake 
I was contented to lose my all 
that I might gain and be found 
in Him, the possessor not of 
a self-righteousness, earned by 
meritorious obedience to a code 
of precepts, but of that which 
comes by faith in Christ, that 
which is the gift of God Him- 
self on the footing and ground- 
work of the Gospel. Yes, to 
know Him, and His resurrec- 
tion-power and passion-fellow- 
ship—day by day growing into 
the very likeness and form of 
His death, if so be I may ar- 
rive at last at the blessed resur- 
rection from among the dead—. 
this, this is my goal. Not that 
I received at once, when I gave 


myself to Him, the thing de- 


67 


\ 4 
BreéreTE Tous Kakous 2 


sired and made for—not that I 
am already arrived at the per- 
fection or the consummation of 
the. Christian being—not this. 
No, I am pressing on towards 
an object not yet reached. It 
was in order that I might at 
length grasp this, that Christ, 
one memorable day, laid hold 
on me. Do not suppose, I be- 
seech you, that I (long as I 
have been in the race) reckon 
myself to have grasped the prize. 
One thing, one only, I can say— 
that, like the runner, I forget 
the things behind, the part of 
the course already traversed, 
and strain every sinew and every 
muscle to get over the ground 
in front of me, and thus, with 
the goal full in my view to guide 
my running, I press on toward. 
the prize which lies there, the 
prize for which God in heaven. 
ealled me in the person of Christ 
Jesus,’ 

2. Beware of| The Greek 
says only, look at, observe. But 
the sense is just as in Mark xii. 
38, where the addition of from. 
(arc) expresses the avoidance 
which is here implied. 

The dogs| Thus the term of 
reproach usually applied by the 
Jew to the Gentile (see Matt. 
xv. 26) is here turned upon the 


5—2 


68 


3, concision. 


TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


III. 2 dogs, beware of the evil workmen, beware of the 
For we are the circumcision, we who 


worship by the Spirit of God, and glory in Christ 
4 Jesus, and trust not in flesh: although I too 


might trust even in flesh. 


If any other man 


5 thinks to trust in flesh, 1 more: circumcised the 


Judaizer. He by his refusal of 
the true hope of Israel, salva- 
tion in Christ alone, has made 
himself the alien which he calls 
the Gentile (Eph. ii. 12). 

Evil workmen| Not exactly 
in the sense of evildoers, but in 
that of labourers (Matt. ix. 37. 
xx. 1, James v. 4) or craftsmen 
(Acts xix. 25) who, eitherthrough 
incapacity or malice, spoil and 
ruin their work. Compare 2 
Cor. xi. 13, such men are false 
apostles, deceitfulworkmen, trans- 
Sorming themselves into apostles 
of Christ. It is against Ju- 
daizing Christians, not against 
openly hostile Jews, that St 
Paul is warning the Philippians. 

The concision|] A happily 
chosen rendering for a word 
(xararoiy) intended as a con- 
temptuous travesty of circum- 
cision (zeptroun). Where (1) 
circumcision was not God’s or- 
dinance (as it never was for the 
Gentile), or where (2) circum- 
cision was trusted in for salva- 
tion (as it never ought to have 
been by the Jew), it became at 
once a mere mutilation, rather 
shamefulthanhonourable. Here 
St Paul uses the word concision 





collectively, for the whole party 
and community of Judaizers, 
just as the circumcision is used 
for the Jewish nation in Rom. 
iv.g. xv. 8, Gal. il. 7, &c. Eph, 
li, 1. 

3. We] We Christians are 
the real circumcision. For the 
expression, see the above note. 
And for the thought, compare 
Rom. il. 29. Gal. iii. 7, 29. vi. 16. 

Who worship by the Spirit of 
God] The received text reads, 
Who worship God (@e@) in spirit. 
An easier reading. In the re- 
vised text worship has no case 
after it; as in Luke ii. 37 (wor- 
shipping with fastings and sup- 
plications), Acts xxvi. 7 (ear- 
nestly worshipping night and 
day), Heb. ix. 9. x. 2. And 
the Spirit of God is spoken of as 
the instrument of the worship; 
by His presence, agency, grace, 
and inspiration, 

Worship| The term (Ac- 
tpevev), though not originally 
so restricted, is appropriated in 
Scripture to a divine and spe- 
cially a ritual and sacerdotal 
worship. See Rom. ix. 4, who 
are Israelites; whose 18...the 
service (of God). Heb. ix. 1, 6, 


POs PIAINMHSIOTS. 


épyaras, BAerere Thy KaTaTouny. rueis yap III. 3 


69 


9 4 ~ , 

ETMEV Hf WENLTOMN, Ol WvEevMaTL Oeov AaTpEVOVTES 

Kat Kkavywuevot ev Xpiote “Inco Kal ovw év 
, A / 

capki wemoWortes kaiwep eyw Exwv meroiOnor 4 


9 , 
kal év oapKi. 
’ , 9 ‘ ~ 
€y oapKl, eyw pmaddor: 


ordinances of (divine) service.. 
the ts go im continually 
into the first tabernacle, accom- 
plishing the services. xili. 10, 
they who serve the tabernacle. 
St Paul claims here for all 
Christians that spiritual priest- 
hood which is the antitype (un- 
der Christ the one High Priest) 
of the whole Levitical system. 
Compare Acts xxvii. 23, God, 
whose I am, whom also I serve. 
Rom. i. 9, God, whom I serve 
an my spirit in the Gospel of 
His Son. 2 Tim. i. 3, God, whom 
I serve from my forefathers in a 
pure conscrence, 

And glory wn Christ ada 
To glory or triumph (xavyac0a 
in a thing or person is one of 
St Paul’s favourite expressions. 
He uses it almost sixty times 
in his Epistles, St James and 
the writer to the Hebrews alone 
sharing it with him. Heseems 
to have derived it from Jerem. 
ix. 11, which he quotes more 
than once. 

And trust not wm flesh | Flesh 
is the antithesis of spirit in all 
senses. Thecontrastrunsthrough 
all St Paul’s Epistles, though it 


rf ~ / a 
ei tris Ooxet a@AAos re7robevat ° 


TEPLTOMH GKTANMEPOS, 5 


is most fully drawn in those to 
the Romans and the Galatians, 
The present passage shows how 
comprehensive is the term flesh 
in St Paul’s thought; including 
not only all external privilege, 
of birth, nationality, and class- 
religion, but also all that self- 
effort and self-attainment which 
is independent of divine grace. 
4. Might trust] Literally, 


have confidence; that is, as the 


context interprets, material of 


confidence 7f such can anywhere 
be found. 
Thinks to trust} The con- 


struction is that of Matt. iii. 9, 
think not to say within your- 
selves. 1 Cor. xi. 16, if any 
man thinketh to be contentious. 
The expression seems to come 
from the wnpersonal use of the 
same verb (doxeiv), and to be 
equivalent to thinks té good or 
right to do so. 

. Curcumeised the eighth 
day| And therefore a born 
Jew, no proselyte. 

Of the race of Israel] Re- 
gularly descended from the father 
of the patriarchs. See 2 Cor. xi. 
22, are they Israelites? so am I. 


70 TO THE PHILIPPIANS, 


III. 5 eighth day, of the race of Israel, of the tribe of 
Benjamin, a Hebrew of Hebrews; as to law, a 


6 Pharisee; as to zeal, a persecutor of the Church; 
as to righteousness, such as law has in it, blame- 


7 less. 
Of the tribe of Benjamin] 


Able to name my tribe, as well 
as my nation. And that a dis- 
tinguished tribe; the tribe of 
the first king; the tribe which 
alone was faithful to Judah in 
the great division. 

A Hebrew of Hebrews] No 
Hellenist, or son of Hellenists; 
true from my forefathers to the 
language and customs of the 
Hebrew race in its purity. 

As to law] Doubtless when 
St Paul speaks of law it is the 
Jewish law, and not the Roman 
or any other, that he has in the 
background (at least) of his 
thought. The law of Moses 
was his specimen and embodi- 
ment of all law, human and Di- 
vine. But this does not pre- 
clude him from generalizing the 
idea, from speaking of the prin- 
ciple as well as of the instance. 
There are points in which even 
the Jewish law shares with other 
laws; as a rule of duty, even as 
a revelation of duty, it may be 
conceived as having, if not rivals, 
at least parallels, in other codes: 
Nature has her rule of duty, Pa- 
radise had its revelation of duty. 
We claim for St Paul the free- 
dom of saying a law, law, or 
the law, at his pleasure, and ac- 


But whatsoever things were gains to me, 


cording to the shade of thought 
intended. There are passages in 
which hecombinesthe varying ex- 
pressions, passages in which he 
contrasts them, passages in which 
he uses one or uses another, and 
it is seldom, if ever, impossible 
totrackhim. Here, as to daw— 
as regards the revelation of 
duty, whatever 2 was, under 
which I lived—I was not only 
mindful of it, I was a member of 
that particular body of religion- 
ists who were notorious for their 
scrupulosity in its observance. 

A Pharisee} Acts xxii. 3, 
brought up...at the feet of Ga- 
maliel, instructed according to 
the strictness of the law of our 
fathers, xxiii. 6, [ am a Phari- 
see, the son of Pharisees. XxXxXvi. 
5, after the strictest sect of our 
religion I lived a Pharvsee. 

6. As to zeal, a persecutor| 
Acts xxii. 3, 4, being zealous 
for God...for I persecuted thix 
way unto the death, Gal. i. 
13, 14, I persecuted the Church 
of God, and wasted tt...beiny 
more exceedingly zealous for the 
traditions of my fathers. 

A persecutor of the Church] 
1 Cor. xv. 9, because I perse- 
cuted the Church of God. Gal. 
i, 23, our former persecutor. 





TIIPOS 1 ®SIAINNHSIOTS. 


71, 


éx yévous ‘lapana, gvarrs Benapetv, “EBpaios é£ III. 5 
"EBpaiwy, cata vouov Papiraios, kara Cidos 6 


, 4 9 7 4 
Swwkwy TyHy éxkAnoiav, KaTa Sikatoourny Thy év 

4 ” s S ed > ; 
yOuw yevomevos aueurrros. adAa aTiva nv pot7 


The Church| From the 
classical use of the word (éxxAx- 
cia) as the assembly of adult, 
freeborn, legitimate citizens, 
through the application of it in 
the Septuagint to the congrega- 
tion (or gathered people) of Js- 
rael, it passes into the Chris- 
tian sense of (1) the whole body 
of professed believers in all ages 
and nations, as in Matt. xvi. 18 
(on this rock I will build my 
Church), 1 Cor. xii. 28. Eph. 
i, 22. &e. Col. i. 18, 24 ; (2) the 
several provincial or local Chris- 
tian communities representative 
of the universal,as in Matt. xviii. 
17 (tell it unto the Church), Acts 
Vlil, I. XlVv. 23, 27. &. Rom. 
xvi. 1. &c. x Cor. xi. 16. &e.; 
(3) the local Church actually 
assembled for worship, as 1 Cor. 
xi, 18 (when ye come together in 
congregation), Xiv. 19, 28. &e. 
In the text St Paul probably 
means the Church universal, 
though the actual persecution 
could only affect particular com- 
munities (Acts xxvi. Io, 11, 
and this I also did in Jerusa- 
lem...and being exceedingly mad 
against them, I persecuted them 
even unto foreign cities). 

As to righteousness} The 
clause begins as though St Paul 


were about to assert his blame- 
lessness absolutely. But this 
with his present view of righ- 
teousness, as lying far deeper 
and rising far higher than mor- 
ality, he cannot do, and there- 
fore he adds the limiting words, 
that righteousness, I mean, which 
as contained in (obedience to) law, 
that is, to any rule or revelation 
of duty under which the indi- 
vidual may be placed. So far, 
and with that limitation, blame- 
less. Compare Rom, ix. 31, 
but Israel, following after a 
law of (capable of gwing) right- 
eousness, did not attain to such a 
law. See note on verse 5, As to 
law. 

Blameless| The Greek says, 
having become (or come to be) 
blameless. It expresses the re- 
sult of the life. But it has no 
real English equivalent, and the 
Authorized Version omits it, 
with no loss to the sense. The 
rendering found blameless is un- 
satisfactory in a passage where 
Sound occurs just below (verse 9) 
with so important and emphatic 
@ meaning, as the translation of 
its regular Greek equivalent. 
See note on 11. 14, That ye may 
be. 

7- Gains} The plural is 


72 


TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


III. 7 these I have counted for Christ’s sake loss. 
8 Nay rather, I do count all things to be loss for 
the sake of the more excellent knowledge of Christ 
Jesus my Lord, for whose sake I suffered the loss 
of all things, and do count them but refuse, that 


important. Separate items of 
profit. The figure is that of a 
great account-book, on one side 
of which are entered all the par- 
ticulars of the income. St Paul 
speaks of himself as having 
transferred all the entries (as he 
had once made them) of guin to 
the side of loss. 

Have countel| The perfect 
tense is a combination of prete- 
rite and present. It expresses 
a past act having consequences 
in the present. I did so and 
so, with abiding effect. The 
estimate of gain and loss here 
spoken of was made at his con- 
version, and his life still bears 
the impress of it. 

For Christ's sake] Because 
of Christ, Because they could 
not be kept with Christ, and be- 
cause they were valueless with- 
out Him. This more general 
sense is better than to antici- 
pate verse 8 by the interpre- 
tation, for the sake of gaining 
Christ. 

Loss| The word (fypia) oc- 
curs elsewhere in Scripture only 
in the narrative of the ship- 
wreck, Acts xxvii. 10, 21, the 


voyage will be with injury and. 


much loss...and not have gotten 


this injury and loss. The ac- 
companying word there, wyury 
(vBpis, properly injury with in- 
sult), marks the strength of the 
word before us. 

8. Nay rather| The phrase 
here is a confluence of no less 
than five Greek particles, of 
which the central three (pév 
ovv ye) form a combination ex- 
pressing the correction of a fore- 
going statement as either erro- 
neous or else inadequate, See 
Rom. ix. 19, 20, thow wilt say, 
Why doth He still find fault?... 
nay rather, O man, let this be 
the question, who art thou that 
repliest against God? x. 18, 
where, as here, the previous 
statement 1s corrected a3 tnade- 
quate, St Paul has spoken (verse 
7) of (1) ceréain things, now he 
speaks of all things. He has 
spoken of (2) having accounted, 
now he speaks of accounting. 
The nay rather both expands the 
scope and advances the time. 

I do count] Literally, J also 
or even count. The emphatic 
do answers the purpose in Eng- 
lish, 

All things] The stress is on 
the all, as explained in the above 
note, Vay rather, 


NPO> SIAINMHSIOTS. 


Képon, TavTa Hynua dia Tov Xpiorov Chpiav. III. 7 


73 


: A \ > Ve ~ , , > 
GNAG MEV OUV YE Kal yryoUMat TavTAa Chpiav evar 8 
~ t ~ ~ 
Sia TO vmepexov ths yuwoews Xptorou ‘Incow 
a , > a \ ’ ’ , \ 
tov Kupiov wou, 6 ov Ta mavra ECnmwOnv Kai 


yryouua: oxuBadra iva Xptorov Kepdnow kal ev- 


The moreexcellent knowledge | 
This rendering is framed on 2 
Cor. iv. 17, our light affliction 
which is for the moment ; where 
the literal rendering would be, 
the momentary light thing of 


(consisting of, which is) our af- 


fliction. So here, for the sake of 
the surpassing thing of (consist- 
ang of, which is) the knowledge of 
Christ. In the one passage, it 
is not the lightness of the afflic- 
tion (the fact that it is light), 
but the affliction which 1s light, 
which works out the glory. In 
the other, it is not for the sake 
of the superiority of the know- 
ledge (the fact that it is superior), 
but for the sake of the knowledge 
which 18 superior, that he counts 
all things loss. 

My Lord| This individual 
appropriation is rare in St Paul. 
Gal. 11. 20, who loved me, and 
gave Himself for me. Compare 
note on i. 3, My God. 

I suffered the loss of | More 
exactly, [ was sentenced to the 
loss of (énpsw6yv). The figure 
is that of a fine or penalty im- 
posed by a court. St Paul thus 
expresses the utter confiscation 
of all that he had, position, pos- 


session, reputation, family, so- 
ciety, interests, prospects, and 
still more (to such a man) reli- 
gious advantages, hopes, and 
confidences, to which he sub- 
jected himself by becoming a 
Christian. For the figure see 
Matt. xvi. 26, of he shall gain 
the whole world, and forfeit (be 
sentenced to the loss of) his life. 
Luke ix. 25, if he gain the whole 
world, and lose or forfeit (be 
sentenced to the loss of) his own 
self, 1 Cor. iii, 15. 2 Cor. 
Vili. 9. 

All things| The definite 
article here seems to look back 
to all things (without it) in the 
first line of the verse, and to 
say now those all things of which 
I spoke, Otherwise it may be 
taken as my all. 

And do count] Thus he goes 
on from the single act of the 
past (I suffered the loss) to the 
continually repeated act of the 
present (and do count). 

Refuse| The doubtful deri- 
vation of the word (cxvBada) 
may justify either rendering, 
that of the text, or that of the 
margin, of the Revised Ver- 
sion. 


74, 


TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 
III.9 I might gain Christ, and be found in Him, not 


having a righteousness of my own, such as law 
can give, but that which is through faith in 
Christ, the righteousness which is of God on the 
10 ground of the faith; to know Him, and the power 
of His resurrection and partnership in His suffer- 


That I might) Or may; 
according as we make it depend 
more upon suffered or upon 
count. 

Gain Christ] The single 
item replaces all the cancelled 
items. Whatsoever things were 
gains (verse 7) I now count loss 
for the sake of the one gain. 
Compare Eph. iii. 8, the un- 
searchable riches of Christ. To 
gain Christ is to receive posses- 
sion of Him as one’s own for use 
and enjoyment, so as to justify 
the above expression, my Lord. 

And be found in Him} 
The figure is that of a search 
and discovery. As the ‘slayer’ 
pursued by the ‘revenger of 
blood’ is safe in the ‘city of re- 
fuge’ (Num. xxxv. 11, &c.), 80 
the Christian, renouncing all 
self-confidence and self-depend- 
ence, is found in Christ, safe and 
uncondemned, in the great day. 
For found, see 2 Cor. v. 3, we 
shall not be found naked. And 
for the sense, compare Rom. 
vill. 1, there 2s therefore now 
no condemnation to them that 
are in Christ Jesus. 

Such as law can give| Liter- 


ally, which is from (out of, deriv- 
able from obedience to) a law. 
Compare verse 6, such as law 
has in tt; literally, which 1s in 
(contained in, to be found in 
obedience to) a law. The two 
expressions are equivalent. In 
both cases, though the law of 
Moses may be the example in 
St Paul’s mind, the principle 
lies deeper, and he expresses 
himself accordingly. 

Which is of God] Literally, 
which is from (out of, as its 
source and origin) God Himself. 
Compare Rom. i, 17. iii 21, &c. 
x. 3. 
On the ground of the faith] 
See note on i. 25, Joy in the 
faith. Here the faith seems to 
be the true rendeving, indicated 
by the presence of the definite 
article (ért 77 wiore.) which was 
absentaboveinthe words through 
faith (8a riorews) in Christ. 
For the preposition (éri) com- 
pare Matt. xvi. 18, on this rock 
L will build my Church. Eph. 
il. 20, bwilt upon the foundation 
of the Apostles and Prophets, &c. 
The righteousness which has 
God for its Author rests upon 








WPOS SIAINMHSIOTS. 


pcOe ev avtw, pn exw éunv SuKaoovrny tv éx III. 9 


75, 


A A o~ A 9 
vomov, dAAa THY dia TiotTEws XpioTov, THV éK 


~ , » A ~ , ~ ~ » A 
Geou dikaioovyny ert TH TWLOTEL’ TOU YYwvat avTOV IO 


‘ , ~ 9 , ~ 4 
Kat Tyhv dvvauw THs dvacTacEews avTOU Kal Kol- 


the basis of the faith, that is, 
the Gospel. 

10. To know Him] It 
seemed desirable to mark thus 
the change of construction here 
from the form, that J might, &e., 
of verses 8 and g, into the equi- 
valent phrase, for the ( purpose 
of) knowing, &c. 

Him, and| First the know- 
ledge of the Person, and then of 
a twofold aspect and relation of 
the Person. 

The power of His resurrec- 
tion] This might mean either 
(1) the power exerted in raising 
Hum, or (2) the power urith which 
resurrection invested Him. The 
former interpretation might 
claim the support of Eph. i. 18, 
k&ec., that ye may know what 18 
the exceeding greatness of His 
(God's) power toward us who 
believe, according to (on the scale 
of) that working of the strength 
of His might which He wrought 
in Christ when He raised Him 
Jrom the dead. But the latter 
best suits the context here. To 
know by daily spiritual experi- 
ence Christ's resurrection-power. 
See Rom. xiv. g, to this end 
Christ died, and lived (again), 
that He might be Lord both of 


the dead and living. 2 Cor. xil. 
9, that the power of Christ may 
rest (tabernacle) upon me. Rev. 
i. 18, J was dead, and, behold, 
I am alive for evermore, and I 
have the keys of death and of 
Hades. 

__And partnership m| It is 
difficult to express in English 
the peculiarity of the Greek, 
which connects this phrase with 
the former by placing both un- 
der the winculum of a single 
article. Zhe power...and part- 
mership. The two particulars: 
are inseparable. To know the 
one is to know the other. His 
resurrection-power and passion 
Jellowship. If we would feel 
His power, we must share His 
sufferings. 2 Cor. 1 5, even 
(according) as the sufferings of 
Christ abound unto (have their 
redundance and overflow in) us, 
even 80 through Christ abounds 
also our encouragement. iv. 10, 
11, always carryyng about in 
the body the putting to death of 
Jesus, that the (risen) life also 
of Jesus may be manifested in 
our body, &ce. Col. i. 24. 1 
Pet. iv. 13, rejoice in so much 
as (in proportion as) ye are part- 
ners in Christ's sufferings. — 


76 


TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 
III. roings, being gradually conformed to His death, 


11 if by any means I shall arrive at the resurrection 
12 from the dead. Not that I at once received, or 


am already perfected; 
Conformed to] Made of one 


form with, assimilated to, made 
to resemble, Christ’s death, that 
is, Christ in His death. See 
the Visitation of the Sick, ‘There 
should be no greater comfort to 
Christian persons, than to be 
made like unto Christ, by suffer- 
ing patiently adversities, trials, 
and sicknesses... He entered not 
into His glory, before He was 
crucified. Our door to enter 
into eternal joy is gladly to die 
with Christ.’ Rom. vi. 3, &e. 
we were buried with Him...into 
death...we have become wnited 
(made of one nature) with the 
likeness of His death...we died 
with Christ...reckon yourselves 
to be dead men with regard to 
sin, &e. 

11. Jf by any means| St 
Paul speaks of it as a difficult 
attainment. Matt. xix. 26, with 
men this is umpossible. The con- 
nexion of this clause with the 
preceding has an exact parallel 
in Rom. viii. 17, tf 80 be that 
we suffer with Him, that we may 
be also glorified with Him. 

I shall| Or, L might; for 
the form of the verb is ambigu- 
ous between the indicative (fu- 
ture) and thesubjunctive (aorist). 
Still as (1) grammatical correct- 
ness, and (2) the clear parallel 


but I press on, if so be 


of Rom. i. 10, where the same 
particles (ei mws) are found with 
an unquestionable indicative, 
favour the shall of the text, we 
may fairly give it the preference. 
The same remark will apply to 
Rom. xi. 14, where there is a 
like ambiguity. On the other 
hand, in verse 12 there is an 
evident subjunctive (with é«i), 2f 
so be I may apprehend. The 
combination, tf by any means I 
shall, brings into striking union 
the two thoughts, the difficulty, 
and the certainty. 

Arrive at] As the terminus 
of the life-journey. The word 
occurs repeatedly in the Acts in 
its literal local use (xvi. 1. xviii. 
19. &c.). St Paul employs it 
figuratively (as.in the text) in 
Eph. iv. 13, él we all reach 
(arrive at) the unity of the faith, 
ce. 

The resurrection from the 
dead| The twice repeated from 
(out of, or from among) of the 
Greek cannot be reproduced in 
English. The word used here 
(alone) for resurrection is liter- 
ally resurrection-from (éavdora.- 
cts), and the same preposition is 
repeated. It strongly marks 
the idea of a select resurrection; 
in other words, of a blessed (as 
opposed to a promiscuous) re- 


IPOS, SIAINMHSIOTS. 


vwviay tabnuaTtwv avrov, cuppopdiCouevos Tw III. 10 


77 


, ’ ~ wv , > | > 
Oavatw avTov, e ws KaTavTnow els THY e€a- II 


- t s ~ 
" vaoTacwW TnV EK VvEeKpwP. 


ovx OTe Hon EXaBov 12 


/ 
7m non TeTEeAcLwua StwKw Oe Et Kat KaTarcaBw 


surrection. It is the resurrec- 
tion of the just (Luke xiv. 14. 
Acts xxiv. 15), of life not of 
judgment (John v. 29), of the 
dead in Christ (1 Thess. iv. 16). 
The apparently equivalent ex- 
pression of Rev. xx. 5, 6 (the 
Jirst resurrection) is capable of 
another sense, and cannot be 
quoted with absolute confidence 
as a parallel text. 

12. Not that I] The vi- 
gorous statement preceding, of 
his having renounced all things 
for Christ, and of its grand com- 
pensation, might give an impres- 
sion of attainment and perfection 
which he proceeds to repudiate, 

At once received| The tense 
of the Greek points to a single 
past moment, evidently that of 
his conversion. And the ren- 
dering already is incompatible 
with the expression of this in 
English, The phrase at once 
may give something of the idea, 
though it has the disadvantage 
of not being equally suitable to 
the same (jreek word in the ac- 
companying clause. 

Recewed| The thing to be 
received is implied, not express- 
ed; as in Luke xi. 10, every. 
one that asketh receweth (under- 
stand, the thing asked). Here 


we may supply, the ultumate object 
of my abandonment of my all, 
the whole of the gift of grace 
and glory which was to be even- 
tually mine. The Authorized 
Version, by rendering two dif- 
ferent Greek words by the same 
English (attain...attained) in 
verses 11 and 12, has suggested 
a misleading antithesis. 

Perfected| This important 
word occurs here alone in St 
Paul’s writings (it is replaced by 
another word in the revised text 
of 2 Cor. xii. 9). In the Epistle 
to the Hebrews it occupies a 
prominent place, in several ap- 
plications. Properly meaning 
to make mature or complete, it 
passes into the sense (1) of per- 
fectly qualifying for an assigned 
work, whether by consecration 
(Heb. vii. 28) or experience 
(Heb. ii. ro. v. 9), or (2) of 
bringing into a satisfactory state, 
whether of spiritual peace (Heb. 
Vli, 19. 1X. 9. xX. I, 14) or final 
blessedness (Heb. xi. 40. xii. 23). 
In the text St Paul uses it, by 
a modification of the sense last 
mentioned, in reference'rather to 
a moral perfection. 

I press on| This verb (8isxw) 
is commonly transitive, to pur- 
sue or follow after (as in Rom. 


ITI. 


78 


TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


12I may apprehend that for which I was also 


13 apprehended by Christ Jesus. 


Brethren, I do 


not yet reckon myself to have apprehended; but 
one thing J do—forgetting those things which are 
behind, and reaching forth toward those things 


14 which are before, I press on, with the mark in 


ix. 30. Xli 13. xiv. 19. &c.), and 
might be so taken in this verse. 
But as in verse 14 it must be 
intransitive, it may be better 
to keep the unity of the passage 
by making it so here, 

If so be I may) Literally, 
if I may also (or even). If I 
may (not only press on, but) 
also (or even) attain my object 
in doing so. Perhaps the above 
rendering is close enough. And 
indeed the unusual construction 


(<i with a subjunctive), of which. 


only some two other examples 
(1 Cor. xiv. 5. 1 Thess. v. ro) are 
found in St Paul, seems to re- 
quire some emphasizing of the 7/. 

Apprehend| Lay hold upon, 
grasp. The same contrast be- 
tween the same two words is 
seen in Rom. ix: 30, the Gen- 
tiles, which followed not after 
righteousness, apprehended righ- 
teousness. Compare 1 Cor. ix. 
24, so run, that ye may appre- 
hend. 

That for which} That thing 
with a view to which. This is 
the simple and satisfactory ren- 
dering. The alternative, given 
in the margin of the Revised 
Version, seeing that (for that), 


has the support (1) of a like 
phrase (颒 }) used in that sense 
in Rom. v. 12 and 2 Cor. v. 4, 
and (2) of the use of apprehend 
(with no case after it) in 1 Cor. 
ix. 24. But it seems inferior in 
force and ease, both here and in 
lv. 10, where also it has a place 
in the margin of the Revised 
Version. 

I was also apprehended| The 
figure is deeply impressive. 
Christ Himself is represented as 
having grasped or seized the per- 
secutor as he drew nigh to Da- 
mascus (Acts ix. 3, &c.); and 
that, with a definite design and 
purpose (that for which, &c.), 
namely, his salvation and bless- 
edness. It is striking that here 
the object is not made to be St 
Paul’s preaching or evangelizing 
(as in Gal. 1. 16), but his own 
personal happiness. 

13. Brethren] When this 
word begins the sentence, it is 
always in preparation for a par- 
ticularly earnest appeal. See 
Rom. x. 1. 1 Cor. xiv. 20. Gal. 
ill, 15. vi. 1. 2 Thess. v. 25, 
brethren, pray for us. 

I do not yet reckon myself] 
The J and myself are both em- 





IPOS SIAINMHSIOTS. 


ép’ @ kal KateAupOny vo Xpiorov “Incov. III. 12 


79 


‘ A a 
adeAol, éyw éeuavTov obmw DoyiCouat KaTel- 13 
. 9 A , A A 9 , 9 / 
Anhévat> ev d€, Ta mev OTriow émtavOavopevos 

n \ of ’ , \ 1 
Tow o€ Eumpoabey emEKTELVOMEVOS KATA OKOTTOV 14 


phatic, and stand together first 
in the Greek. It is not quite 
easy to say with what special 
intention, (1) J, long as I have 
been running. Or (2) J, though 
I am your appointed guide and 
example, Or (3) /, whatever 
others may think of me. Or 
(4) J, whatever others may think 
of themselves, The first seems 
the most natural and most suit- 
able to the context. 

But one thing| One, and 
one only. Probably an accu- 
sative, but the verb is not ex- 
pressed. It might be (from the 
former clause) J reckon, or take 
as my principle of thought. 
Perhaps the more general ex- 
pression, J do, is the simplest 
and best. 

Forgetting] Like the run- 
ner, who would lose the race by 
looking behind him. 

Those things which are be- 
hind] Compare Gen. xix. 26 
(Septuagint), his wife looked to 
the things behind. Mark xiii. 
16, let him not turn back to the 
things behind. Luke ix. 62, 
having put his hand to the 
plough, and looking to the things 
behind. John vi. 66, many of 
Hrs disciples went away to the 
things behind. These examples 


will suggest ample illustration 
of St Paul’s saying. Zhe things 
behind are the things of the past 
life; its motives and principles, 
its habits and confidences. The 
precept of forgetting is the cor- 
rection alike of elation and of 
depression, of half-heartedness 
and backsliding. 

Reaching forth toward] Lit- 
erally, stretching myself forth 
toward ; exerting to the utter- 
most every limb and muscle so 
as to reach. It is a lively and 
vigorous picture of the runner. 

Those things which are. be- 
fore] The things of the new 
and future life; its joys and 
hopes, its heaven here and here- 
after. 

14. Wath the mark in view 
Literally, according to (by the 
rule of) a certain mark or ob- 
yect, indicating to the eye of the 
runner the goal of the race. 
This point in the distance is said 
here to regulate the running, 
keeping it straight and direct. 

The prize| 1 Cor. ix. 24, 
all run, but one receives the 
prize. The word is formed from 
that which means wmpire (Bpa- 
Bevs) or judge of the contest. 
St Paul has told us in verse 11 
what is the prize—a blessed re- 


III. 


80 


TO THE aaa 4 


14 view, unto the prize of the high calling of God 


in Christ Jesus. 
15 


Let us then, so many as are perfect, be thus 


minded: and if in any thing ye are otherwise 


16 minded, this also will God reveal to you. 


Only, 


to whatsoever we have attained, by that same 


thing walk. 


surrection. Compare 2 Cor. v. 
2, longing to be clothed upon 
with our habitation which ts from 
heaven (the spiritual body of 1 
Cor. xv. 44). 

Of } Belonging to; which is 
the subject and promise of the 
Christian calling. 

The high calling] Literally, 
the above (avw) calling. (Com- 
pare Gal. iv. 26, the Jerusalem 
which is above. Col. iii. 1, 2, 
seek those things which are above, 
dc.) Equivalent to the heaven- 
ly calling of Heb. iii. 1. (See 
Acts ii. 19, in the heaven above.) 
The force of the two phrases 
lies not in the idea of upward 
or to heaven, but in that of the 
Person who calls being Himself 
above or in heaven. Compare 
1 Pet. i. 12, them that preached 
the Gospel unto you by the Holy 
Ghost sent forth from heaven. 

Calling| A favourite Scrip- 
ture figure, representing the 
Gospel (1) as an invitation from 
God to a feast of blessing (Isai. 
xxv. 6). Matt. xxi. 3, sent 
forth his servants to call to the 
marriage-feast them that had 
been called. Or else (2) as a 


personal swmmons to a personal 
following. Matt. iv. 21, He 
saw other two brethren...and 
called them. The calling is al- 
ways ascribed in Scripture to 
God Himself (Rom. viii. 30. &c. ). 

In Christ Jesus] God’s call 
is made in Christ Jesus, it is 
contained in Him, alike as its 
meritorious cause and its life- 
giving virtue. 

15,16. ‘Let this constant 
struggle after a perfection not 
yet attained be the very mark 
and badge of the perfect. That 
which is yet lacking to you God 
will communicate in its season. 
Only be faithful to the know- 
ledge already vouchsafed.’ 

15. Let us then] There is 
no emphasis on us. The Greek 
order is, as many then as are 
perfect, let usbe thus minded, 

Perfect} The rendering is 
not quite satisfactory, the idea 
being simply that of maturity as 
opposed to infancy. Heb. v. 14, 
but solid food belongs to full- 
grown (perfect) men, &c. 1 Cor. 
ii. 6, but we speak wisdom among 
(in the judgment of) the perfect. 
The choice of the word in thetext 


TIPOS PIAINMHSIOTS. 8i. 


Suskw els TO BpaBetov tis dvw KAnoEws TOU Geo IIT. 14 


ev Xpiotw ‘Incov. 


4 sy ~ ~ of : 
“Ooo ovv TéAELOt, TOUTO PpovwmueEv’ Kal El TLIS 
e , ~ \ ~ e | a 9 4 
ETEpws Ppovere, kat TOUTO O Oeos Umiy arroKaNv- 
A >] ee , ~ 9 ~ ~ 
We. Any es 0 epbacaper, TW avTwW TTOLXEV. 16 


suggests the question whether 
perhaps there was some leaven 
of self-conceit among the Philip- 
pians, requiring to be reminded 
that true perfection has for one 
at least of its characteristics a 
sense of imperfection (I count 
not myself to have apprehended). 

Thus| How? Is the refer- 
ence to the whole preceding pas- 
sage, with its renunciations, as- 
Pirations, and concentration of 
efforts? Or does it (as suggest- 
ed in the last note) point speci- 
ally in the direction of humility ? 
The next clause, 7fin any thing 
ye are otherwise minded, seems 
to show that the reference must 
not be too much narrowed. 

Otherwise] Than as has been 
laid down in the foregoing para- 
graph? Or, than as you ought 
to be? The latter is best, and 
a fuller stop than would else 
have been required has been ac- 
cordingly placed after thus mind- 
ed. St Paul’s thought is taking 
a new direction, and this is the 
point of transition. 

This also} This in which 
you are at present at fault, as 
well as that which has already 
been rightly apprehended. 

feveat| All spiritual reali- 


Vv. P. 


ties have a veil over them to 
our sight till God lifts it up to 
disclose first one portion and 
then another of the whole thing 
that is. See 1 Cor. iL g, &e., 
things which eye saw not...unto 
us God revealed (unveiled) them 
through the Spirit, dc. And 
this, which is spoken of as an 
accomplished act in general, is a 
gradual and progressive act for 
the individual. 

16. Only] Though the 
promise of gradual enlighten- 
ment is true and to be relied 
upon, there is one condition; 
namely, that we must carefully 
uge the light already communi- 
cated. 

To whatsoever] Whatever is 
the attainment (in knowledge of 
truth and duty) already reached, 


it must be made the rule of . 


our steps. Otherwise, being 
unfaithful to our present trust, 
we cannot look for additions to 
it. Luke vill. 18, whosoever 
hath, to him shall be given, dc. 

Have attained] The have is 
not in the Greek, which rather 
looks back upon the past as a 
single act. Zo whatsoever ye 
attained in that which lies be- 
hind of the life. The nicety is 


6 


TIL. 17 


82 


TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 
Be ye imitators together of me, brethren; and 


mark them that so walk even as ye have a pattern 


18 1n us. 


For many walk, of whom I often spoke to 


you, and now speak even weeping, as the enemies 


scarcely capable of expression 
in English. 

Attained} The word (¢6a- 
yew) is properly to anticipate 
(x Thess. iv, 15, shall not anti- 
cipate them that are fallen a- 
sleep); and so (1) to arrive at a 
place by anticipation of others, 
to reach a person by surprise 
(Matt. xii. 28); and (2) to ar- 
rive at, or attain to, without any 
such additional idea (Rom, ix, 
31). 

By that same thing walk] 
The rest of the verse as it stands 
in the received text is omitted 
in the revised, with a marked 
difference in the sense. There 
it was, Only (for to this we have 
attained) walk by the same rule, 
be of the same mind. It wasa 
precept of unity. Without the 
additional words, it is a precept 
of fidelity to the amount of 
light already given, whatever 
it be. 

Walk| This is not the com- 
mon word for walking, though 
even that (zepimaretv) is some- 
times used in the same construc- 
tion and sense (Acts xxi. 21. 2 
Cor, xii, 18, Gal. v. 16). De- 


rived from a noun meaning a 


row or rank, the word before us 
(cro.xety) is (1) sometimes used 
absolutely, to walk in an orderly 


manner (Acts xxi. 24), and (2) 
more often with a dative of the 
regulating principle, Thus Rom. 
iv. 12, who walk by the steps of 
that faith, dc. Gal. v. 25, of 
we live by spirit, by spirit let us 
also walk, vi. 16, a8 many as 
shall walk by this rule. In the 
Athenian military oath the pro- 
mise was given, not to desert the 
soldier by whom (not by whose 
side, but by whose regulating 
step as it were) the man 
walked. 

17—21. ‘Let me be your 
example, There are those whose 
example could but mislead. I 
told you of them often when I 
was with you—I tell you of 
them now with tears. 'ne- 
mes of the cross of Christ is 
their true title. Their end is 
destruction. Appetite is their 
God, Their glory is in their 
shame. Earthly things are their 
thoughtand theiraffection. How 
different is the Christian life ! 
heaven already our home and 
our country, on which the eye 
is ever fixed in patient waiting 
for a Saviour’s Advent, to change 
the body of our humiliation into 
the likeness of His body of glory, 
in the exercise of a power which 
is able to put all things under 
Him,’ 





IPOS SIAIMUHSIOTS. 
Luvuintai pou yiveobe, ddeAdot, cat oxo- III, 17 


83 


~ N e/ ~ N / 
TEITE TOUS OVTW TEpiTaTOoUYTas KaDws EvETE 


, ~ 
TUTrOV nas. 


~ eA 
TOAAOL yap Tepitatovaw, ovs 18 


, xf ~ ~ \ 4 A , 
wodAakis EAeyov Umiv, vuv Oe Kat KNalwy Ey, 


17. Imitators together] The 
compound word occurs only here; 
but the phrase itself, and even 
the present application of it, is 
common in St Paul (1 Cor. iv. 
16. xi. r. 1 Thess. i 6. &c.). 
The rendering imitators is not 
pleasing, but the alternative 
followers conveys a different 
idea. The idea of a copyist 
(which is that of the word) should 
lose its disparaging associations 
when the model is one of moral 
perfection. Eph, v. 1, be ye 
therefore imitators of God, as be- 
loved children. 3 John 11, tmi- 
tate not that which 18 evil, but 
that which is good; he that doeth 
good is of God. 

Mark| Here for imitation, 
as elsewhere (Rom. xvi. 17) for 
avoidance, 

Walk] The common Scrip- 
ture figure for the daily life, 
which is rather a walk than a 
journey. This figurative use is 
seen in the Gospels (Mark vii. 
5. John vill. 12. xii. 35, walk 
while ye have the light), and be- 
comes very common in the E- 
pistles, occurring in almost every 
one of them, beginning with 
Rom. vi. 4, might walk in new- 
mess of life. 


Pattern| The literal sense 
of the word (rvzos, type) is seen 
in Acts vii. 44 (from Exod. xxv. 
40), that he should make it after 
the type (model) that he had 
seen. Its figurative senses be- 
gin in the Epistles, where, for 
example, Adam is a type of 
Christ (Rom. v. 14), Christians 
obey a particular type or pat- 
tern of teaching (Rom. vi. 17), 
the Israelites in the wilderness 
are types of us (1 Cor. x. 6), and 
Christians, whether ministers 
(2 Thess. iii, 9. 1 Tim. iv, 12, 
Tit. 1. 7. 1 Pet. v. 3) or people 
(1 Thess. i. 7), are types (models 
Jor vmitation) to others. 

18, For] There is room 
and need for the charge thus 
given, for the conduct of many 
is quite opposite. 

Many walk| The sentence 
is somewhat broken. It begins 
as if its course would be, For 
many walk otherwise, as enemies 
of the cross. But the parenthe- 
sis (of whom I often spoke to you, 
éc.) interposes, and modifies the 
following clause. 

Spoke| Used to speak when 
I was with you in my several 
Visits, 


6—2 


84 


TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 
III. 19 of the cross of Christ; 


whose end is destruction, 


whose god is the belly, and whose glory is in 


20 their shame; who mind earthly things. 


For our 


citizenship is already in the heavens; from whence 
also we wait for a Saviour, the Lord Jesus Christ, 


Enemies of the cross] The 
term would suit either Judaizers 
(Gal. vi. 12) or Antinomians, 
Some may have been both (see 
Rom. xvi. 17, 18. 2 Cor. xi. 
13—15. Gal. v. 12, 13. vi. 13, 
14). But it is clear that St Paul 
is dealing now with the latter. 
See note on verse 15, Otherwise. 
The humbling, softening, trans- 
forming power of the Cross, its 
unselfishness, unworldliness, new 
estimate of sin, regeneration of 
motives and principles, all this 
is an offence to them; in their 
hearts they hate, in their lives 
they contradict it. They are 
still enemies in spite of (nay, 
enemies of) the reconciliation 
(Rom. v. 10); still enemies wm 
mind, because still living in 
wicked works (Col. 1. 21). 

19. Whose end is| The ex- 
pression (and the structure of 
the phrase) is that of 2 Cor. xi. 
15, whose end shall be according 
to their works, Heb. vi. 8, of 2 
(the land) beareth thorns and 
thistles, it 18 rejected, and nigh 
unto a curse; whose end 1 to 
be burned. 

Destruction] See note on i. 
28. The word is the keynote of 
2 Pet. ii. alse teachers, who 





shall privily bring in herestes (or 
sects) of (doomed to) destruction. . 
bringing upon themselves swift 
destruction ... their destruction 
slumbereth not (verses 1 and 3). 
Whose god t8| Rom. xvi. 

18, such men serve not our Lord 
Christ, but their own belly...they 
beguile the hearts of the innocent. 
There St Paul seems to have 
teachers specially in view, and 
the charge will be that of merce- 
mariness even more than of sen- 
suality. Compare 2 Pet. ii. 3, 
in covetousness shall they with 
Seigned words make merchandise 
of you. Soint Tim. vi. 5, sup- 
posing that godliness 1s a means 
of gain (compare verse 3, tf any 
man teaches a different doctrine). 
Tit. i. 11, teaching things which 
they ought not, for filthy lucre’s 
sake. In the text there seems 
to be no direct, certainly no ex- 
clusive, reference to teachers, 
and the warning will become 
the more general one, against 
the idolatry (in whatever form) 
of appetite. 

Whose glory] This great word 
(Sega), used (1) in the Septua- 
gint for the visible light of God’s 
presence (in the tabernacle, tem- 
ple, &c.), and (2) in ordinary 


IPOS SIAINMHSIO‘TS. 


Tous €xOpovs Tov aTavpov Tov Xpiorov* wy To III. 19 


85 


4 , a \ , 
TéXos drwAEa, wy 6 Geos 4 KotNia, Kal 4 SoFa 


> ~ , = ; > /f a“ 
év TH aiaxyuvy avTwv, ol Ta Eriyera PpovouvTes. 


pwY yap TO ToNTEULaA év OUpavois Urapxet, EF 20 


e \ “a 9 , , 9 ~ 
OU Kat owtipa amexdexoueba Kuptoy ‘Incovv 


Scripture language for God’s 
self - manifestation spiritually, 
and hence (3) for the future 
manifested sonship of the blessed, 
is here by a very rare use ap- 
plied (4) to the wnagznary excel- 
lence of the fallen human being, 
which in reality consists in that 
which is its disgrace rather than 
its glory. 

Shame] Jude 13, foaming 
up their own shame (shames). 

Who mind| The construc- 
tion here returns to the nomina- 
tive, agreeing (intentionally or 
by accident) with the many of 
verse 18. 

Mi Have as their one 
subject of thought and their one 
object of affection. The word 
(ppovetv) is characteristic of this 
Epistle and of that to the Ro- 
mans. 

Earthly things| James iii. 
15, nota wisdom descending from 
above, but earthly, dc. In Col. 
iii. 2 St Paul uses the resolved 
form, set your mund on the things 
that are above, not on the things 
that are upon the earth. 

20. For| How opposite is 
this to the life to which I invite 
you—for, &e. 

Citizenship| This is perhaps 


as near an approach as can be 
made in English to the sense 
of the Greek word (zoA/revza), 
which is properly a thing done 
as @ citizen, and so an act, 
function, or department, of the 
citizer-life. It is here used for 
the sum of the citizen-life (in the 
spiritual and heavenly sense of 
that word). Our citizen-life is 
already in heaven. See note 
on i, 27, lave your citizenship. 
And for illustrations of the 
thought see Gal. iv. 26. Heb. 
xi. 10, 16, the city which hath 
the foundations, dc. xil. 22, ye 
are come to...the city of a lwing 
God, the heavenly Jerusalem. 
xiii, 14. Rev. iii. 12. xxi. 2. 


Is already| See note on ii. 
6, Subsisting. It is the same 
word (virapxet). Our citizen-life 
as already (18 to begin with, is as 
the basis and groundwork of all 
thought, feeling, and action) in 
heaven, where Christ is. See 
Eph. i. 3. ii. 6, Col. iii, r—4. 

We wait for a Saviour] Or, 
we wait for the Lord Jesus 
Christ as our Saviour. But the 
construction adopted in the text 
is simpler and more natural. 


Wait for) One of St Paul’s 


IV.1 


86 TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


III. 21 who shall change the fashion of the body of our 


abasement into the form of the body of His glory, 
according to the working of His power even to 
subject all things unto Him. 


strong double compounds (azrexe 
SexoueGa), suggesting intense 
earnestness of expectation. Rom. 
Vill. 19, 23, 25. 1 Cor. i. 7, watt- 
ing for the revelation (unveiling) 
of our Lord Jesus Christ. Com- 
pare Heb. ix. 28, to them that 
wait for Him He shall appear 
a second time...unto salvation. 
The salvation which is still fu- 
ture, the Saviour still waited for 
in that character, is described in 
verse 21. Rom. viii. 23, wait- 
ang for an adoption, which is, 
the redemption of our body by 
resurrection. 2 Cor. v. 2, 4. 
Thus salvation itself is either 
past, present, or future, accord- 
ing as redemption, grace, or g.ory 
is the thing in view. 

21. Change the fashion of | 
Transfigure. It is remarkable, 
however, that the word before 
us (peracxnparifery) is not the 
one applied to the Transfigura- 
tion of our Lord, but the other 
and stronger term (peraproppove- 
6a); perhaps because the 
Transfiguration was the antici- 
pative assumption of that resur- 
rection body which is permanent 
and everlasting. The distinc- 
tion between the words form 


Therefore, my brethren beloved and longed 


(nopgy) and fashion (cxjpa) 
has been glanced at in a note 
on ii. 6, The form of God. That 
distinction is strictly adhered to 
in the language of this verse, 
Who shall change the (temporary 
and fleeting) fashion of this body 
of flesh and blood into the (abid- 
ing and indestructible) form of 
His own glorified body. For the 
word see 1 Cor. iv. 6. 2 Cor. 
xi, 13, 14, 15. 

Of our abasement| Belonging 
to (characteristic of ) our abase- 
ment, a8 inheriting the conse- 
quences of sin entering into the 
world, and death by sin (Rom. 
v. 12). For the word see Acts 
viii. 33 (from the Septuagint 
Version of Isai. lili. 8), in His 
abasement His judgment was 
takenaway. And forthethought, 
Rom, viii. 20, the creation was 
subjected to vanity (emptiness 
and nothingness)...by reason of 
Him who subjected rt, in hope, 
dc. The rendering of the text 
might be, owr body of abasement 
...is body of glory. But the 
sense 1s the same. 

Into the form of | More ex- 
actly, (so as to be) of the same 


Jorm with, 1 Cor. xv. 49, even 








TIPO SIAINMHSIOTS. 


Xpictov, os petacynuatiog to owma ras III. 21 


87 


, ~ 4 ~ tA ~ 
TATEWVWOEWS NUWY TUUMOPHOV TW TwMaTL TNS 


, 9 ~ A A > # ~ , 
So€ns av’rov kata Tnhv évepyecav Tov duvacba 


9 4 A e , 9 ~ 
QUTOV Kal UTOTAageal aUTW 


“QOore, adedpoi pov 


as we wore in this life the image 
of the earthy, of him who was 
made of the dust or mould of 
the earth (Gen. ii. 7), we shall 
_ also wear the image of the hea- 
venly. The word (cvppopdos) 
occurs only besidesin Rom. viii. 
29, to be conformed to the image 
of His Son. 

Of His glory| Belonging to 
(characteristic of ) His manifes- 
tation as the Son of God with 
power by resurrection of the dead 
(Rom. i. 4). Compare 1 Pet. i, 
21, who raised Him from the 
dead, and gave Him glory. John 
xvi. 1. Acts ll, 13, &e. 

According to the working] 
This transfiguration by resur- 
rection will be according to (on 
the scale of, proportioned to, com- 
mensurate with, as might be ex- 
pected from) the exercise of a 
power which 18 absolutely unt- 
versalinitsrange. See Eph.i. 19, 
20, what is the exceeding great- 
ness of His power toward us who 
believe, according to the working 
of the strength of His might 
which He wrought in Christ 
when He raised Him from the 
dead. 

The working of His power] 


/ 
Ta WaVvTa. 
5) 5a \ ee /. 
dyarntot Kat emo- IV. 


As in the passage quoted above 
(Eph. i. 19, 20), so here the 
possession of power is distin- 
guished from the exercise of it. 

To subject all things unto 
Him| The reference is to Psalm 
viii. 6 (the text of 1 Cor. xv. 
27, &c. and of Heb. ii. 8), Zhou 
didst subject all things under his 
Jeet (the feet of man, and there- 
fore of the Man), 

Unto Him| Christ. The 
rendering Himself, though cor- 
rect in sense, seems not to lie in 
the Greek (according to the now 
generally received accentuation) 
and not to be necessary in En- 
glish. Compare, for example, 
Eph. i. 5, having foreordained 
us unto adoption through Jesus 
Christ unto Him (that is, Him- 
self, but the reflexive sense, 
though obvious, isnotexpressed), 

IV. 1. ‘Stand fast then in 
the Lord.’ 

1. My brethren beloved and 
longed after] This prolonged 
form of address has no parallel 
in St Paul’s Epistles. 

Longed after| The adjective 
occurs only here. But the verb 
has already occurred twice in 
this Epistle, See i. 8. ii. 26, 


88 


Lord, beloved. 


TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 
IV. 1 after, my joy and crown, so stand fast 1n the 


2. I beseech Euodia, and I beseech Syntyche, to 

3 be of the same mind in the Lord. Yea, I pray 
thee also, my true yokefellow, help them ; for 
they shared my contest in the Gospel, together 
with both Clemens and the rest of my fellow- 
workers whose names are in the book of life. 


My joy and crown] Com- 
pare 1 Thess. ii. 19, what 1s our 
hope, or joy, or crown of glory- 
ang? are not even ye...for ye 
are our glory and joy. 

Crown] Of the two senses 
of crown, a king’s diadem, and 
a victor’s wreath, the latter is 
clearly meant here, and gener- 
ally in St Paul (1 Cor. ix. 25. 
1 Thess. ii. 19. 2 Tim. iv. 8), 
while the former is predominant 
in the Book of Revelation and 
in the Septuagint. 

So] In this way, on these 
principles; specially those of the 
last paragraph of chapter 1i1., 
the avoidance of evil example, 
the realization of the heavenly 
citizenship, and the maintenance 
of the Christian expectation. 

Stand fast] See note on i. 
28. 

2, 3. ‘I hear of discord 
between two Christian women. 
I beseech them to be at one 
again. Help them, my trusty 
comrade, in becoming so. They 
deserve this of thee; for they 
aided me in days past, in the 


struggles of the Gospel, with 
Clement and my other fellow- 
labourers whose names are in 
the book of life.’ 

2. J beseech] Euodia and 
Syntyche were evidently two 
Christian women at Philippi, 
between whom a misunderstand- 
ing had arisen. 

In the Lord] St Paul re- 
minds them of the Christian 
motive and principle of union. 
All being contained in one Per- 
son, how can there be place or 
room for discord ? 

3. Yea] Philem. 20, yea, 
brother, may I have profit of thee 
an the Lord. The yea empha- 
sizes and supplements a previous 
request. 

True] For the word true 
(genuine, the opposite of spurious 

or pretended) see note on ii. 20. 

Yokefellow| Who is intend- 
ed is uncertain. There is no 
mention in the Epistle of any 
one presiding or leading person 
at Philippi to whom such a 
phrase would apply itself as a 
matter of course. In the ab- 





IIPOD ®IAIITNHZIOTS. 


é€v Kupiw, ayamnrot. 


a VA ~ 
Evodiay trapaxado kai Lvuytuxnv wapaxado 2 


» + + ~ > , 
TO Q@UTO dpovety €v Kupiw. 


\ 2? ~ \ , 
Val ENWTW Kat GE, 3 


t , , +) ~ e/ ? 
yunow ouvCvye, cvvAauBavov avtais, aitives év 
~ 9 Xi Or , A \ Kx. / 
Tw evayyeAtw GuynlAnoay pot META Kat nMev- 


~ ~ ~ & \ 9 , 
TOS Kai TwWY OLTwY DUVEpYywWY foU wY Ta dVO- 


para év BiBAw Cons. 


sence of any such obvious appli- 
cation, Epaphroditus the bearer 
of the Epistle may be thought 
of. The idea (favoured by some) 
of a proper name, Syzygus, does 
not commend itself on the whole, 
though it would have the ad- 
vantage of giving force to the 
epithet genuine as indicating a 
play upon the name like that 
upon Onesimus (profitable) in 
Philem. 11. 

Help them| In the difficult 
work, that is, of reconciliation. 
The word (ovAAapBaverGar) is 
that of Luke v. 7, they beckoned 
to ther partners in the other 
boat, that they should come and 
help them. It is an expressive 
figure; that of laying hold of a 
weight or burden along with 
another, so as to share the toil. 

For they| More exactly, 
persons who. A reason for tak- 
ing pains in effecting their re- 
conciliation. They are worthy 
of the effort. 

Shared my contest] Liter- 
ally, contested along with me. 


See note on the same word in 
i. 27, Sharing the contest of. St 
Paul at Philippi was an athlete, 
contending for a prize, and these 
Christian sympathizers (though 


they were women) are said to 


have taken part with him in 
that contest. 

In the Gospel| In the matter 
of the Gospel. is contest was 
not one of personal success or 
worldly distinction. Its subject 
was the Gospel. In the Gospel 
it was comprised and contained. 

With both] The both is un- 
graceful in English, but the 
Greek suggestsitrather than also. 

Clemens| Evidently (in this 
connexion) a Philippian Chris- 
tian, and apparently of at least 
ten years’ standing as such. 
What else he may have been 1s 
conjectural, The name is too 
common to prove an identity. 

The book of life} Literally, 
a book of, belonging to, having 
for its characteristic, /ife (in the 
sense stated in note on ii. 16, A 
word of life).. The figure is that 


89 


‘ . , , e/J / 
Onrot, xapa Kai orTedpavos pou, ovTws otHKxeTe IV. 1 


90 TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


IV. 4 
5 Rejoice. 


Rejoice, in the Lord, alway: I will say it again, 
Let your charity be known unto all 


6 men. 


The Lord is nigh. Be anxious about 


nothing, but in every thing by your prayer and 
your supplication, with thanksgiving, let your’ re- 


of a list or ‘register’ (Ezra ii. 62. 

Neh. vii. 5) of names, at pre- 
sent secret, hereafter to be open- 
ed. In Gen. v. 1 (Septuagint) 

we have a book of the generation 

of men, open and public: in 
Exod, xxxii. 32, 33, we read 
of a book which God has written, 

and from which He blots out (or 
refuses to blot out) individual 
men. The same figure is used 
in Psalm Ixix. 28, let them be 
blotted out of the book of the 
living, and not be written with 
the righteous. Isai. iv. 3 (Sep- 
tuagint), they shall be called 
holy, all that are written unto 
life in Jerusalem. Ezek. xiii. 9, 
neither shall they be written in 
the writing of the house of Israel. 
Dan. xii. 1, thy people shall be 
delivered, every one that shall be 
found written in the book. Luke 
x. 20, but rather rejoice, because 
your names are written in hea- 
ven. Heb. xii. 23. Rev. xiii. 
8, written in the book of life of 
the Lamb, xvii. 8. xx. 12, 15. 
Xxl. 27. 

4—7. ‘Once more, rejoice. 
Rejoice, in the Lord. Rejoice 
always. Yet once more, rejoice. 
Let all men see what spirit ye 
are of. The Lord is nigh, for 
help and salvation. Let prayer 


-—- -—s — 
a ee ~~ - - 


replace and cast out anxiety— 
prayer with thanksgiving. So 
shall heart and thought find 
their perpetual safe-keeping in 
that peace of God which no in- 
tellect of the wise and prudent 
can either communicate or com- 
prehend.’ 

4. Rejoice] See notes on 
lil. I. 

Will say| The tense is un- 
doubtedly future, as in all the 
other places of the use of the 
word by St Paul and other wri- 
ters. 

5. Charity] Or charitable- 
mess, The disposition of the 
érvecxys, aS drawn by Aristotle 
in the Ethics, has been said to 
be the nearest approach in any 
heathen writer to St Paul’s cha- 
racter of aydmy in 1 Cor. xiii. 
And if ‘charity’ in that chapter 
and other places of its occur- 
rence must be replaced by ‘love,’ 
it may still keep a place in the 
English Bible as the rendering 
of the word before us. The idea 
of the word is primarily fair or 
reasonable, but it passes on into 
kindred associations, such as 
forbearing, considerate, kind, 
gentle. See, for example, 2 Cor. 
x. 1 (where it is combined with 
meekness), 1 Tim, iii, 3 (with 





TIPOS SIAITIMHSIOTS. QI 


Xaipere év Kupiw mavrore* mwaduw épw, yai- lV. 4 


PETE. 


e , 9 / 
qo. 0 Kuptos eyryus. 


\ 9 A e ~ , ~ ) / 
TO emetkes Uo yrwoOnTw Tacw avOpw- 5 
pndev mepiuvare, aN’ 6 


> q ~ ~ 4 ~ , > 9 
€v TAVTL TH TpOTEVXYH Kal TH SenoEL MET EVXA- 


uncontentious). Tit. iii. 2 (with 
ancontentious and meeckness). 
James iii. 17 (with peaceable and 
easy to be entreated). 1 Pet. ii. 
18 (with good, and in contrast 
with froward). The remaining 
passage is Acts xxiv. 4, where 
it is rendered clemency. 

Be known| Or, come to be 
known. It is the tense used in 
Luke xxiv. 35, and how He was 
known of them in the breaking 
of the bread. 

The Lord 18 nigh] In which 
of the two senses, (1) near for 
access, or (2) near in approach? 
Either of the two would well suit 
the precept which follows a- 
gainst anxiety, while the former 
best suits the precept of prayer. 
Parallel passages may be quoted 
for either. Thus (1) Psalm xxxiv. 
18 cxix. 151, Thou art near, O 
Lord, exlv. 18, the Lord 1s nigh 
untoall them that call upon Him, 
dc. (2) Matt. xxiv. 33, know ye 
that He is nigh, even at the doors. 
Mark xili. 29. On the whole, the 
former thought seems to predo- 
minate. Zhe Lord 1s nigh for 
perpetual access to Him; turn 
anxiety into prayer. 

6. Be anxiousabout nothing] 
Matt. vi. 25, &c. Luke xii. 11, 
&e, 1 Pet. v. 7, casting all 


your anxiety upon Him, because 
He careth for you. 

By your prayer| The defi- 
nite article (twice repeated) 
seems to mean that prayer and 
that supplication which of course 
you make, The rendering your 
gives this sense. 

Prayer...supplication| The 
same combination is found in 
Eph. vi. 18, and (in the plural, 
and in the inverse order) in 1 
Tim. v. 5. In Heb. v. 7 the 
latter of the two words (déyars) is 
combined with another (ixernpia) 
of which supplication is the only 
possible rendering, and must 
therefore find for once some 
other translation, In 1 Tim, i1 
1 we have yet another word 
added to the two in the text. 
The words are not synonymous. 
Prayer (wrpooevxy) is the general 
word for any address to God; 
supplication or petition (dénors). 
is the expression of definite 
wants; and the less usual term, 
application or entreaty (évrevéis), 
indicates rather the earnestness 
of the suppliant than any special 
characteristic of the appeal it- 
self, 

Wth thanksgiving] The 
prominence of thankfulness, as 
a precept of duty, in this group ' 


92 


TO THE PHILIPPIANS, 


IV. 7 quests be made known unto God. And the peace 
of God, which transcends every mind of man, 
shall guard your hearts and your thoughts in 


Christ Jesus. 


8 Finally, brethren, whatsoever things are true, 
whatsoever things are grave, whatsoever things 


of St Paul’s Epistles, is striking 
and suggestive. See Eph. v. 20. 
Col. ii. 7. iii, 15. iv. 2. In 
St Paul’s own mind it was per- 
haps equally powerful in the 
earliest. See 1 Thess. i 2. ii 
13. li go. 2 Thess. L. 3. id 13. 
Even as a precept, we find it in 
1 Thess. v. 18, in every thing 
give thanks; for this is the will 
of God im Christ Jesus concern- 
ing you. 

Your requests} The same 
word (airnza) is found in the 
same connexion in 1 John v. 15, 
whatsoever we ask (request), we 
know that we have the petitions 
(requests) which we have asked 
(requested) of Him. 

Made known unto God| A 
very unusual phrase and thought, 
that of making known to the 
Omniscient. 1t occurs once in 
the Septuagint Version of Psalm 
xxxii. 5, J made known my sin 
unto Thee, dc. 

7. The peace of God| That 
harmony of the being, which is 


God's gift. See note on i. 2, 
Peace. 
Which transcendseverymind | 


This seems to be the accurate 
rendering and the true sense of 


the words. Not all understand- 
tng, which would imply in En- 
glish the act of understand- 
ing, but every wnderstanding, 
that is, every intellect or mind. 
About the usage of the word 
(vots) there can be no question. 
It is always mind, not exercise 
of mind. Luke xxiv. 45 (the 
ouly occurrence of the word in 
the Gospels), then opened He 
their mind, that they might un- 
derstand the Scriptures. And 
so throughout St Paul’s Epistles, 
ending with 2 Tim. iil. 8, men 
corrupted in ther mind. This 
is the point of difference between 
the phrase before us and a like 
expression in Eph. iil. 19, do 
know the love of Christ which 
passes knowledge (which, how- 
ever, surpasses the knowing ; 
which, after all, is beyond the 
sphere of the very knowledge of 
it which I desire for you). In 
the text, not knowledge, but 
mind, is the word used. The 
peace of God lies in a higher re- 
gwon than intellect.. A pregnant 
saying, suitable to these times. 
Shall guard| Shall keep as 
an a fortress. For the proper 
meaning of the word (dpovpeiv) 


TIPOS SIAITIIHSIOTS. 


plorias Ta aiTnuaTa vuwv yvwpiCecOw mpos tev IV. 6 
kal n €ipnyn Tov Seou 4 vmepexouca 7 


A 
Geor, 


93 


~ , A e e 
wavTa vouv ppovpnoce Tas Kapdias Yuwy Kat Ta 
vonpata vuov év Xptoro “Inoov. 
) , e ~ / 
To Aowrov, éeAGot, boa éoriv ddnOy, boa 8 


, tA , 14 
aeuva, boa dikata, doa 


see 2 Cor. xi. 32, mm Damascus 
the governor under Aretas the 
king was guarding the city...to 
take me. The two purposes of 
such guarding, to keep foes out, 
and to keep friends in, are seen 
in the text, where the peace of 
God is represented as garrison- 
ang heart and thought, protect- 
ing alike from attack from with- 
out and from perilous roving 
from within. For metaphorical 
uses of the word, compare Gal. 
iii, 23, before the faith came, we 
were kept in ward under a law, 
shut up unto the faith, dc. 1 
Pet. i. 5, who are kept in ward 
in God’s power through faith 
unto salvation, dc. The protec- 
tive power of divine peace, first 
upon the heart, out of which are 
the very issues of the life, and 
secondly upon thought, even in 
its intellectual processes, is a 
suggestive thought, due no doubt 
to a deep personal experience, 
and very full of wisdom. 
Thoughts] Not minds (Au- 
thorized Version), but operations 
of mind (voypara). The whole 
thoughtis confused by the double 
nistranslation—({1) all under- 


, e/ ~ 
ayva, 07a TpoacdiAn, 


standing for every mind, and 
then (2) minds for thoughts. 

In Christ Jesus] Christ is 
the fortress within which divine 
peace guards heart and thought. 
Thus the metaphor is thoroughly 
and yet simply worked out. In 
the passage quoted above (1 Pet. 
1. 5) divine power is the fortress 
within which Christians are kept 
in ward. Scripture metaphor is 
free and versatile, capable of 
many adaptations. 

8, 9. ‘Let your thoughts 
run on things true and pure, 
virtuous and praiseworthy. Let 
your acts be consistent with my 
teaching and my example. Sw 
shall the God of peace be with 

ou.’ 
8. Finally| See note on 
lil. 1. 

Grave| The rendering is 
not quite satisfactory, and yet 
honourable is ambiguous and 
venerable impossible. Meaning 
properly worthy of reverence 
(cepvos from oéBopar), the word 
came to denote that weight and 
dignity of character which re- 
spectable once expressed, but 
from which it has now sunk in 


94 TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


IV. 8 are just, whatsoever things are pure, whatsoever 
things are kind, whatsoever things are gracious, 


if there is any virtue, and if there is any praise, 


9 take thought for these things. 


What things ye 


both learned and received and heard, and saw in 


common usage to a lower level. 
Under these circumstances the 
rendering grave (with its remi- 
niscence of the Latin gravis, 
which carries the very idea 
wanted) may perhaps be accept- 
ed, both here and in the Pas- 
tural Epistles, where St Paul 
makes it one of the characteris- 
tics of the Christian life gener- 
ally (1 Tim. ii. 2), and in parti- 
cular of the presbyter (1 Tim. 
iii, 4), of deacons (verse 8), of 
deacons’ wives (verse 11), of 
aged women (Tit. ii. 2), and of 
the bishop himself (verse 7). 
rind| The word (poo¢t- 
Ays), occurring here only in the 
New Testament, but twice in 
the Apocrypha (Kcclus. iv. 7. 
xx. 13), has the two leading 
senses of dear (acceptable) and 
kind (friendly). The latter seems 
best to suit the present context. 
Gracious| This word (evdy- 
pos), like the last, occurs no- 
where elsein the New Testament. 
Its kindred verb is found in 1 
Mace. v. 64, uttering joyful accla- 
mations. The rendering of good 
report, in the sense of well re- 
ported of, seems to have no clear 
support, and would besides an- 
ticipate praise in a following 


clause. Its opposite (dvo¢70s, 
abusive, scurrilous) confirms the 
rendering gracious, with refer- 
ence to kindliness and charity 
of speech. 

If there 1s any| In other 
words, whatsoever is virtuous, 
and whatsoever 18 praiseworthy. 
For the form of expression see 
11.1. Rom. xili.g. Eph. iv. 29, 
such (speech) as is good (liter- 
ally, if any 18 good). 

Virtue] The word (apery) 
is used here only by St Paul. 
In 2 Pet. i. 5 wirtue stands in 
the climax of Christian attain- 
ment between faith and know- 
ledge. Inverse 3 of that chapter 
itis ascribed to God: who called 
us by (or by His own) glory 
and virtue. In 1 Pet. ii g (as 
in Isai. xi. 8. &e.) it is used (in 
the plural) for the divine ezcel- 
lences. In the Septuagint Ver- 
sion of Hab. iii. 3 and Zech. vi. 
13 it is the rendering of the 
Hebrew for glory. It is only in 
the Apocrypha (Wisdom iv. 1. 
dc.) that it has the ordinary 
classical sense (as here) of virtue. 

Praise] In the sense of the 
recognition of excellence by God 
or man. Compare Rom. ii. 29, 
whose praise is not from men, 





TIPOS SIAINMHSIOTS. 


e/ # wv A A f / 
doa evgnua, el Tis apeTn Kat et Tis Ematvos, LV. 8 


TavTa Noyiler de, 


95 


a) / , 
a kal éuabere Kat .mrapeda- 9 


A , \ af / - 
Bete Kal yxovoaTe Kal eldeTe. év Euol, TavTa 


but from God. xiii.3. 1 Cor. iv. 
5. 2 Cor. viii. 18. 1 Pet. ii. 14. 

Take thought for| Take ac- 
count of, as things to be sought 
and aimed at. An exact paral- 
lel does not suggest itself: but 
it is a legitimate application of 
the word (Aoyifer Gat), which in- 
cludes all senses of computing 
and considering. 

9. What things} From 
thought he passes to action. 
The only doubt in this verse is as 
to the grouping and coupling of 
the four particulars, learned, re- 
ceived, heard, saw; whether they 
form two pairs, the words in 
me belonging to both members 
of the second (heard and saw wn 
me); or should rather be ar- 
ranged as three and one, in me 
belonging only to saw, The 
latter arrangement, though it 
_ Inay involve something more of 
redundancy in the terms express- 
ing their reception of the Gos- 
pel, is yet on the whole prefer- 
able, because heard in me would 
suggest a time when he was 
absent from them (see i. 30), 
and thus would confuse the de- 
scription, And indeed each of 
the three words, learned, recerved, 
heard, has its definite and dis- 
tinctive meaning. See the fol- 
lowing notes, 


Learned] As your lesson of 
Christian doctrine. Rom. xvi. 
17, contrary to the doctrine which 
ye learned. Eph. iv. 20, but ye 
did not so learn Christ. Col. i. 
7, even as ye learned from Epa- 
phras, éc. 

Received| As the true Gos- 
pel revelation, The word ex- 
presses a reception by transmis- 
sion, that is, by communication 
as from hand to hand and heart 
to heart. 1 Cor. xv. 1, 3, the 
Gospel...which also ye received... 
I delivered to you first of all 
that which also I received. Gal. 
i. g. Col. ii. 6, as therefore ye 
received Christ Jesus the Lord, 
so walk in Hum. 1 Thess. ii. 13. 
iv. 1. 2 Thess. iii. 6, the tra- 
dition which they (or ye) received 
Jrom us. 

Heard] By oral instruction 
from the living teacher. Rom. 
x. 14, and how shall they hear 
without a preacher? Eph.i. 13. 
iv. 21, tf so be that ye heard 
Him (preached) and were taught 
in Him, de. Col. 1. 6, 23, since 
the day ye heard.,.the Gospel 
which ye heard. 2 Tim. i. 13. 
li. 2, the things whach thou didst 
hear from me, &c. 

And saw in me] Exempli- 
fied in my own practice, Com- 
pare i. 30. 


IV. 9 me, these do. 


96 


with you. 
IO 


TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 
And the God of peace shall be 


But I rejoice, in the Lord, greatly, that now | 


at length your thought for me is revived: and _ 
indeed ye did think of me, but ye lacked oppor- 
11 tunity. Not that I speak on account of want; 
for I have learned, in whatsoever circumstances 
12 I am, to be content. I know both how to be 


And the God] Asif it were, 
And so the God of peace, cc. 
The presence of God, in His 
character of ‘the Author of 
peace,’ can only be where thought 
and act are earnestly and watch- 
fully conformed to the above 
directions. 

The God of peace} Rom. xv. 

3. xvi. 20. 1 Cor. xiv. 33, 

God é is not (a God) of confusion, 
but of peace. 

10o—20. ‘I am thankful for 
your new gifts to me. I know 
that your care for me has never 
flagged, but now you have found 
opportunity to show it. Not 
that I was in want till your 
gifts came—the secret of con- 
tentment has been taught me, 
and in Christ I find myself 
strong for all circumstances, 
whether of adversity or of pros- 
perity. But your liberality is 
welcome, and it is characteristic. 
You know that from the first 
you had a monopoly of helping: 
I had scarcely left you the first 
time when you sent me help 
again and again. Do not think 


me mercenary: I seek not yours, 
but you—not the gift, bat your 
reward for the giving. And now 
your gifts by Epaphroditus have 
made me rich indeed, and God 
has accepted them as a sacrifice 
offered to Himself. Nor will He 
suffer you to lack anything by 
reason of your bounty: He will 
provide—to Him be glory.’ 

10. But] It is the but of 
transition rather than of con- 
trast. 

Rejowe| The Greek form is 
rgowed. See note on ii. 25, J 
have thought. 

In the Lord| See note on 
lil. 1, Jn the Lord. His joy is 
not only a human or natural but 
a Christian joy. 

Greatly] The form (peya- 
Aws) is found only here in Scrip- 
ture. 

Your thought for me] A 
new application of the often re- 
curring verb (dpoveiv), to mind, 
or fo be thus or thus minded. 

Is revived | (1) The figure is 
that of a tree sprouting and 
blooming afresh in spring. (2) 





IPOS SIAINMHZIOTS. 97 


td 
HT PATOETE. 
UUW, 


Kai 6 Oeds THs eipnuns Eora pel’ 1V.9 


"Eyapnv Sé év Kupiw peyadws Ste 76n mote 10 


~ ~ 3 < A 
dveOadeTe TO Umép euov poveiv’ ef’ w Kai €- 


povei re, jxatpeioOe Sé. 


9 ed 9 e v 
ovx OTe Kal’ VoTEpnow II 


/ 9 A ‘ @ ? « > 4 ’ , s 
NEyw* éyw yap Euabor Ev ois Etat aVTApKNS Eval. 


~ 4 , 9 
oda Kai Tarewovcba, oida Kai mepiooevev’ Ev 12 


The verb (avaGadAev), found 
only here in the New Testament, 
has two constructions in the 
Septuagint (compare Ezek, xvii. 
24 with Psalm xxviii. 7), and 
the literal rendering of the 
phrase before us may be either, 
ye revived your thought for me, 
or, ye revived as to your thought 
for me. The latter seems pre- 
ferable. (3) The tense in the 
Greek is the simple praeterite, 
revived. St Paul speaks of the 
moment when the project of 
helping took shape in their 
minds. 

And indeed ye did | Literally, 
on which ye did also think or 
take thought. But the which 
refers rather to the general sub- 
ject, which is, St Paul himself, 
than to the actual words, your 
thought for me. Instead there- 
fore of the more exact rendering, 
which would be and indeed ye 
did think of tt, the form and 
indeed ye did think of me has 
been adopted for the sake of 
clearness. We have here a 
beautiful instance of St Paul’s 
refinement and thoughtfulness, 
The now at length might seem 


Vv. Pp, 


to reproach them for tardi- 
ness; the word revived might 
seem to impute to them a pre- 
vious forgetfulness. He hastens 
to say that he knew the thought 
had been there all along, and 
only an opportunity of acting 
upon it wanting. 

11. Not that I speak] When 
I say that I rejoice in your gift, 
I do not say tt as having wanted 
before. 

Want] The exact form (ve- 
tépynois) is found only here and 
in Mark xii. 44, but she of her 
want did cast in all that she had. 

For J| The pronoun is em- 
phatic. /, however it may be 
with others. 

Have learned| More exact- 
ly, learned; that is, when I be- 
came a Christian. 

Content] The word (avrap- 
xys) is properly self-sufficing, 
and soindependentalike of things 
and persons, 2 Cor. ix. 8, having 
all sufficiency (in your own pos- 
sessions, without having to de- 
pend upon others). 1 Tim. vi 
6, godliness with contentment 28. 
great gain. The word content, 
meaning contained or self-con- 


7 


98 


TO THE “PHILIPPIANS. 
IV. 12 abased, I know also how to abound: im every 


matter and in all circumstances I have been 
taught the secret both how to be filled and how 


to be hun 


, both howto abound and how to 


13 want. I have ‘strength for all things in Him that 


14 enables me. 


tained, as the opposite of a per- 
petual leakage or overflow into 
that which is not ours, is a fair 
English equivalent for the self- 
sufficing of the Greek. 

12. I know] Literally, J 
know to be; that is, I have the 
knowledge for being this or that ; 
the knowledge qualifying me 
for either condition. The con- 
struction, though classical, does 
vot seem to occur elsewhere in 
the Greek Testament. 

Both how| The seritence 
begins as though the two infini- 
tives would hang upon one J 
know. I know both how to be 
abased, and how to abound. But 
to give the greater emphasis a 
second {f know is introduced, 
and thus the both loses its pro- 
priety. Still it may be borne 
with in the English rendering, 
where it has just the same effect 
as in the Greek. 


Abased] Brought low in’ 
outward cir dumistances. J ames. 


i. 10, let the brother of low es- 
tate glory in his exaltation, but 
the rich in his abasement. 
Abound] In earthly pos- 
sessions. Luke xii. 15, @ man’s 
We ts not in his ‘abundance, to 


Howbeit ye did well in having made 
¥5 common cause ‘with my affliction. 


And ye know, 
wit, from the things which he 
posseaseth, 2 Cor..ix. 8. 


In every matter | Literally, 
an every thing and in all things. 
The combination is by no means 
usual. In 2 Cor. xi. 6, where 
the two phrases occur in the 
same clause, the latter should be 
rendered, among (or in the yudg- 
ment of) all men. In the passage 
before us it may be merely an 
emphatic redundancy: tin every 
(separate) thing and in all (com- 
binations of) things. The ren- 
dering adopted is an attempt to 
give distinctness to the two ex- 
pressions. 

Taught the secret} Properly, 
initiated (weuiynpa). The verb 
used is the root of the word 
mystery. Its use here (and only 
here in Scripture) is one of the 
many examples in St Paul’s 
writings of an adaptation to a 
Christian sense of heathen cus- 
toms and phrases. That which 
in heathen Greece was the pri- 
vilege of the few, admission to 
peculiar rites and to a know- 
ledge concealed from the multi- 
tude, has become, under the 
Gospel, the possession of all 
mankind, the ‘open ‘secret’ ofa 








BPOS SIAIIHIHSIOPS. 


qwavtTl Kat €y Waow mepunuat Kal yoptaCerOa IV. 12 


99 


~ 4 4 “~ 
Kal :Wewav, Kal weptoceve Kal voreEpEioOa. 


, - > / ? ~ 9 ~ / 
wavTa toyvw é€v TH évdvvapourTi pe. 


-™ 9 , , , ~ , 
Kadws éromoare cuvKowwyncavtes rou TH OAi- 


new’ revelation and a new son- 
ship, and (which is the point 
here) the direct communication 
of God Himself with the soul of 
the individual man, for spiritual 
transformation into’ ‘the image 
of Himthat created him.’ Psalm 
xxv. 14, the secret of the Lord 
_ 8 with them that fear Him, and 
_ He will show them His covenant. 
Eph. iii. 9, to enlighten all men 
what is the dispensation of the 
mystery which from all ages has 
been hid in God. 

Both how to| See note above, 
onl know. I have been initiated 
to be; that is, J have been taught 
the secret of being tolerant of the 
most opposite conditions. 

Filled...hungry| Luke vi. 
21, blessed are ye that hunger 
now, for ye shall be filled. 

Abound...want| 1 Cor. viii. 
8, neither, uf we eat not, do we 
want ; nor, ifweeat, do weabound, 

13. I have strength for) 
Literally, J am strong as to a 
things. Strong to do, and strong 
to suffer. The construction is 
that of Gal. v. 6, avazleth any 
thing (has any strength). 

In| I find strength for all 
things in Christ. My strength 
les in, 18 contained in, Him. 

Enables} From a rare and 
late adjective (évdvvapos, im 
power, invested arith power) comes 


the verb before us, to endue 
with power, to empower, enable ; 
found also in Actsix. 22. Eph. 
vi. 10. 1x Tim, i. 12, J thank 
Him that enabled me, Christ 
Jesus our Lord. .2 Tim. ii. 1, 
be strengthened (find continual 
strengthening) in the grace which 
is in Christ Jesus. iv. 17, the 
Lord stood by me,and strengthen- 
ed me, | 

14. Howbeit] Though I can 

bear want, yet I am thankful for 
relief. 
. Having made] See notes on 
li, 7, 8, Taking the form... Be- 
coming. * Here the making com- 
mon cause is prior (in concep- 
tion) to the acting upon it. 

Having made common cause 
with| Literally, having become 
fellow-partners with. The afftc- 
tzon is personified, and the Phi- 
lippians are said to have entered 
anto partnership (as it were) with 
it. Compare Eph. v. 11, be noé 
JSellow-partners with the unfruit- 
Sul works of darkness. Rev. xviii. 
4, that ye be not fellow-partners 
with her sins. 

15. And ye know] And 
this 1s not the first time that you 
have thus acted. I need not re- 
mind you that in the first days 
of your Christianity it was, as rt 
1s now, your exclusive privilege 
to assist me. | 

7—2 


awAnv 13, 14 


IV. 


100 


TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


15 Philippians, yourselves also, that in the beginning 
of the Gospel, when I was gone forth from 
Macedonia, no Church had dealings with me in 

16 respect of giving and receiving, but ye only: for 
even in Thessalonica ye sent me both once and 


17 twice help for my need. 


Not that I seek for the 


gift; but I seek for the fruit which is thus multi- 


18 plying to your account. 


But I have all, and 


abound: I am filled to the full, having received 
from Epaphroditus the things from you, an odour 


Yourselves also| As well as I. 

The beginning of the Gospel] 
That is, in ts relation to you. 
The earliest period of your recep- 
tion of the Gospel. The same 
phrase is applied in Mark i. 1 
to the actual opening of the Gos- 
pel history. 

Had dealings withme] Shared 
with me, became my partner. So 
in Gal. vi. 6, let him that ts 
taught wn the word wmpart to 
(go shares with) him that teacheth 
in all (material) good things. 
The word is the same as in verse 
14, except the prepositional 
compound (with) there. It is 
indeed one of the characteristic 
words and ideas of the Epistle. 
See i. 5,7. i x. ill. ro, 

In respect of| Literally, 
unto (so as to form) an account 
(reckoning) of giving and re- 
ceiving. And so in the matter 
of, as regards, ke. 

Giving and receiving | Ecclus. 
xlii. 7, (in) giving and recewing, 
let all be in writing. 

16. or even| And no won- 


der—for even before I quitted 
Macedonia, &c. 

Even in Thessalonica] When 
I had but just left you, and 
during 8o short a stay as I then 
made there. See Acts xvii. 1, 
d&c. The supplies referred to in 
2 Cor. xi. 9, a8 having been sent 
from Macedonia (and, as it ap- 
pears from the passage before us, 
from Philippi), came a little 
later, when St Paul had reached 
Corinth in the same eventful 
journey. Though the supplies 
are not mentioned in the Acts, 
there isaremarkable coincidence 
between the language of Acts 
Xviil. 5 (when Silas and Timo- 
theus were come from Macedonia) 
and that of 2 Cor. xi. 9 (the bre- 
thren, when they came from Mace- 
donia, supplemented my want). 

Both once and twice] It 
seems desirable to retain the 
literal rendering, which marks 
definitely two missions of pecu- 
niary help from Philippi during 
that brief stay in Thessalonica 
of which the history records only 





HPO} PIAINMHSIOTS. 


~bet. 


IOI 


~ 14 
oldate S€ Kai vueis, Pirro, OTe év IV. 15 


. ~ ~ > , ef kee 7] A 
apxy Tow evaryyeMov, OTE eEnrBov amo Make 
b ] > 
Oovias, ovdeuia por éKKAnoia ékowWwynoev Ets 
I , \ , 9 a , 
Aovyov dovews Kai Anurews Et py Ueis provot’ 
ef . 4 yA 
Ort Kat év Oecoadovixy Kal amak Kat Os ets 16 


\ / ee 
THY Xpelay por Erreuate. 


ovx OTL émiCnTw 17 


A , A ~ a ‘ A , 
To doua’ ada émi(nTw@ Tov Kaprov Tov wAEoVva- 


9 a e o~ 
Covra eis Noyov vuav. 


9 4 A , A Y 
aATEXW 0€ TavTa KkatI8 


Tepiocevw* TemTAnpwpat SeEapuevos Tapa ’Erag- 
podirov Ta map’ Uuwv, douny Eevwoias, Ouoiar 


‘three sabbath days’ (Acts xvii. 
2), though it leaves room for 
some little extension of the visit. 

Help for] The Greek has the 
single word wnto. Compare the 
use of the same preposition (cis) 
ini, 5, 12, 16, 25. il. 22. 

17. Not that I] The sen- 


sitive spirit of the writer sug- 


gests a fear lest he should seem 


to be showing a mercenary feel- 
ing. He hastens to correct such 
an impression. Do not suppose 
that it is the gift itself that I de- 
sire: no, tn this ag in all else I 
seek not yours but you (2 Cor. 
xiL 14); and of I value the gift, 
ut is because I see in rt the pro- 
fiting of the givers. 

The fruit} The result and 
product of your bounty in refer- 
ence to its eternal recompense. 
Psalm Ivili, 11 (Hebrew and 
Septuagint), verily there 1s fruit 
for the righteous. Prov. xix. 22 
(Septuagint), mercifulness ra fruit 
toaman. John iv. 36, he that 


reapeth receiveth wages, and ga- 
thereth fruit unto life eternal. 

To your account| Literally, 
unto (so as to form) an account 
(or reckoning) belonging to you. 
It is the same phrase and the 
same figure as in verse 15. See 
note there, In respect of. 

18. ButIhaveall| Again 
the fear suggests itself, lest they 
should suppose him to be urging 
them to fresh giving. He has- 
tens to say, Send me nothing 
more: I have enough, and more 
than enough. 

Have| It is the strong form 
(dréxyw) of have. I have to the 
Full. It isthe word used in the 
thrice repeated they have their 
reward of Matt. vi. 2, 5, 16. 
Luke vi. 24, ye have your con- 
solation. Philem. 15, that thow 
mightest have him for ever. 

I am filled to the full] My 
every want 18 more than supplied. 
For the expression, see 2 Cor. 
vii. 4, J am filled to the full with 





IV. 


102 


TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 


18 0f a sweet smell, a sacrifice acceptable, well- 
19 pleasing to God. And my God will fill to the 
full every need of yours according to His riches 


20in glory in Christ Jesus. 
Father be all glory for ever and ever. 


the comfort given me. 

An odour of a sweet smell] 
He regards the self-denying 
bounty of the Philippians as a 
sacrifice to God Himself, of 
which the scent rises to heaven, 
bringing back God’s blessing 
upon them. The original of the 
phrase is found in the record 
of Noah’s sacrifice in Gen. viii. 
21, the Lord smelled a sweet sa- 
vour. St Paul applies it to the 
sacrifice of Christ in Eph. v. 
2, gave Himself up for us, an 
offering and sacrifice to God for 
an odour of a sweet smell, 

A sacrifice] Thus Heb. xiii. 
16, to do good and to communi- 
cate (umpart) Sorget not ; for with 
such sacrifices God 18 well pleased. 
The same term is applied also to 
the offering of praise, Heb. xiii. 
15; to the presentment of the 
living body, Rom. xii. 1; and to 
all the services of the universal 
Christian priesthood, 1 Pet. ii. 5. 

Acceptable] Luke iv. 19. 2 
Cor. vi. 2. | 

_ Wellpleasing] Rom. xii. 1. 
xiv. 18. 2 Cor. v. 9. Tit. ii. 9. 

19. My God] See note on 
1. 3, J thank my God. 

Will ful to the full] In al- 
lusion to his own like abundance. 
See verse 18, 


And unto God our 
Amen. 


According to| In accordance 
with. On the scale of. As might 
be expected in consideration of. 
See note on iii. 21, According 
to the working. 

His riches| His inexhausti- 
ble stores of good. This spiritual 
application of riches to the un- 
limited resources of the Divine 
capacity. of blessing is peculiar 
to St Paul, and is specially 
characteristic of the Epistles of 
this group. See however also 
Rom. ii. 4. ix. 23. XL 33. 

In glory| The connéxion 
of eae words is not evident. 
The riches of his glory (Rom. ix. 


' 23)givesaclear sense. But riches 


in glory seems a difficult combi- 
nation. Ifthus connected, it must 
mean, according to His boundless 
store of blessing (shown) in the 
manifestation of what Hers. Or, 
it may be taken with the verb, 
fill. He will supply your every 
need...in glory; that is, in and 
by manifesting His own excel- 
lence, showing forth what He is 
in power and in goodness. See 
1, II. 

In Christ Jesus] In whom 
He does all His acts, and most 
of all those acts which concern 
the welfare and comfort of His 
Church and people. 


TiPOS- SIAHMIHSIOTS. 108 


SextTnv, evapertov TH Bea. 6 3E Geos pou wAn- IV. 19 


oe ~ e “~ a 4 ~ 
pwoe maray ypeiay vuwy KaTa: TO, TAOUVTOS 
> ~ / 9 ~ ~ “ ~ 
avrou év d0&4 év Xptaro “Incov. tae dé Oew 20 
~ , > A am. ~ 
Kat waTpl nuov 4 Sofa eis Tous aiwvas Tw 


, ? , 
atwvey*? anv. 


20. And unto God| Nota 
separate and disjoined doxology, 
but in close and natural sequence 
to the verse preceding. He will 
do thus and thus, and to Hum 
be all glory. 

God our Father] More ex- 
actly, to Him who is (1) God; 
and (2) Father of us. The and, 
if retained in English, suggests 
the thought oftwo Persons, which 
the Greek (with its one article) 
precludes. The rendering, our 
God and Father, is quite defen- 
sible (see 1 Cor, vi. 11), but that 
of the text is more according to 
to the usual tenor of Scripture. 

All glory| The definite arti- 
ale might suggest the rendering, 
the glory. But this diverts the 
thought from the proper idea 
of glory, which does not mean 
praise, but (1) forthshining of 
light, manifestation of excel- 
lence, God’s self-manifestation 
in grace, power, &c. (2) the echo 
and reflexion of this..self-mani- 
festation in the admiring adora- 
tion of His creatures. - The lat- 
ter is the sense. here, and the 
article expresses the universality 
and exclusiveness of this ascrip- 
tion. To offer it or any portion 
of it to any other 1s blasphemy... 


Glory universal, All glory. See 
note on iii. 19, Whose glory. — 

For ever and ever| Literally, 
unto the ages of the ages. There 
are two modes of approximation 
to the conception of eternity; 
the one is by negation (without 
end, unending, &c.), the other- is 
by aggregation.. The latter is 
the one used in the phrase before 
us, which takes a preat variety. 
of forms in the Septuagint, but 
of which the. radical idea is the 
word age or period (aidy) in the 
sense of.a long and undefined 
suceession of time: this is en- 
larged into the. plural number, 


and then further amplified, by. 


the addition of:a like genitive, 
also in.the plural, so as to make 
the ages themselves to conszst of 
ages, thus magnifying and mul- 
tiplying the total sum to an ex< 
tent beyond expression in any 
human figures or numbers. The 
particular phrase before us, the 
double plural, appears to be used 
only in the New Testament; 
four times. hy St Paul, once by 
St Peter, and eleven times in 
the Revelation. For a peculiar 
form of the same general idea see 
Eph. iii. 21, unto all the genera- 
tions of the age of the ages. — 


IV. 


104 TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 
21 Salute every saint in Christ Jesus. The 
22 brethren that are with me salute you. All the 


saints salute you, and especially they that are 


of the house of Cesar. 
The grace of the Lord Jesus Christ be with 


23 
your spirit. 


21, 22. ‘Greetings to you, 
individual greetings—in which 
all join with me, especially they 
of the Emperor’s household.’ 

21. Salute] We have ex- 
amples in Scripture of the uso 
of this word (acrafeoGat), (1) 
in meeting, Mark ix. 15; (2) in 
passing, Luke x. 4; (3) in part- 
ing, Acts xx. 1; (4) in absence, 
2 Cor, xiii, 12; (5) in compli- 
ment, Acts xxv. 13; (6) in 
mockery, Mark xv. 18. Often 
as a request from the absent, (a) 
as here, and Rom. xvi. 3—15. 
Col. iv. 15. 3 John 15. &c., 
or (6) with the addition of the 
holy kiss or kiss of charity, as 
Rom. xvi. 16. 1 Cor. xvi. 20. 
2 Cor. xiii. 12. 1 Thess. v. 26. 
1 Pet. v. 14. 

Every saint] See note on i. 
1, Saints. 

In Christ Jesus] These words 
probably belong to the term saint 
(see note on i. 1), and not to 
salute. 

The brethren that are with 
me| The only persons mention- 
ed by name in the Epistle as 
being with St Paul are Timo- 
theus and Epaphroditus, and 
the latter of these probably car- 
ried the Epistle. In the Epistles 


to the Colossians and to Phile- 
mon, belonging to the same im- 
prisonment, but probably to a 
later part of it, several other 
companions are named ; Aristar- 
chus, Epaphras, Demas, Mark, 
Luke, &c. But there is no in- 
dication of their presence in 
this Epistle, and the language 
of ii. 20, 21, unless a somewhat 
arbitrary qualification is put upon 
it, seems to imply that St Paul 
had no such entirely congenial 
companionship when he wrote it. 
22. Of the house of Cesar] 
A comparison of 1 Cor. 1. 16 
with 1 Cor. xvi. 15 seems to 
show that no distinction is to be 
made in the Greek of the New 
Testament between the two 
words house(oixia) and household 
(olxos). Thus the text may re- 
fer not only to actual slaves and 
servants resident in the Imperial 
palace, but to any persons hold- 
ing what we should call house- 
hold offices in the court. But 
doubtless the saying of St Paul, 
not many powerful, not many 
noble, are called (1 Cor. i. 26), 
was literally true of the Roman 
Church when he was personally 
sojourning in Rome. The long 
list of greetings in the Epistle 





TIPOS PIAINMHSIOTS. 


e/ ~ ~ 
"Aoracacbe rmavta ayov év Xpote Incov. IV. 21 
> , e ~ e A ? A , 4 
aomaCovTat vuas of ouv Euot adedot. 


105 


> , : 
ATNA=- 22 


e ~ , e e/ / 4 e 
Covrat Uuas wavTes ot aytot, padtiota Oe ot 


> ~ , > fF 

€x tns Katoapos ouktas. 
‘H xapis tov Kupiov 

TOU WVEvMaATOS UUW. 


to the Romans is the only real 
guide, and that a very partial 
and even ambiguous one, to the 
position and nationality of the 
members of the Church of the 
capital at the time of its writing, 
some four or five years before 
the date of this Epistle, and be- 
fore St Paul had yet visited the 
great city. The expressions 
used in the first Chapter of this 
Epistle imply, however, a mark- 
ed growth of the Roman Church 
in all directions during (and 
partly in consequence of) St 
Paul’s imprisonment. 

23. ‘Grace be with you.’ 

With your spirit] The same 
prayer for the companionship 
of the grace of Christ with the 
sprit of the Christian commu- 
nity is found in Gal. vi. 18 and 
Philem. 25. In 2 Tim. iv. 22 
we have the double form, the 
Lord be with thy spirit: the 
(divine) grace be with you. 

Your spirit] The combina- 
tion of the singular (spirit) with 
the plural (your) is remarkable. 
On the one hand, the spirit is 
an integral part of the constitu- 
tion of the individual man, and 
might have been expected to 


Incod Xpiorou peta 23 


take the plural number when 
a plurality of persons was spoken 
of. But in fact spireés is by no 
means & common expression in 
Scripture, except in certain spe- 
cial cases (such as 1 Cor. xiv. 
23). Thus in Rom. viii. 16, the 
Spirit Himself beareth witness 
with our spirit (not spirits). 1 
Thess. v. 23, may your spirit and 
soul and body, &c. The text last 
quoted gives us not only spurd 
but also soul and body in the 
singular, though with a plural 
pronoun. And so your body 
in 1 Cor. vi.19, although verse 15 
has your bodies. Compare Rom. 
vi. 12 (your mortal body) with 
viii, 11 (your mortal bodies). 
The plural of soud is common. 
See Luke xxi 19. 2 Cor. xi. 
15. 1 Thess. ii. 8. The expla- 
nation of the preference of the 
singular in the case of spirit 
may lie in the unity of that 7- 
dwelling Holy Spirit (Rom. viii. 
11) by whom alone the spirit 
of the man is quickened into 
activity. There is...one Spirit 
(Eph. iv. 4), and in that all-em- 
bracing unity the separateness 
of the individual human spirit is 
in some sense merged and lost. 


Tews 





INDEX OF WORDS, ENGLISH AND GREEK, 
IN TRANSLATION AND TEXT. 


A 
Abase, make lowly (razewoiv) 
u. 8. iv. 12 


A basement (rareivwors) iii. 21 

Abound (weptoc ever) i. 9, 26. iv. 
12, 18 

Absence (azovaia) ii, 12 

Acceptable (Sexz7ds) iv. 18 

Accomplish (émreAciv) i. 6 

Account, count (7yetoGar) ii. 3, 
6,25. iii. 7, 8 

Account, reckoning (Adyos) iv, 
15, 17 

Affections (orAdyyva) i. 8. ii. 
: ; 

Affliction, vexation (Odjiyis) i. 
17. iv. 14 


Already, at once (75y), at length 


(n6y woré), iii, 12, iv. 10 
Always (mdvrore) i. 4, 20. ii. 
I2, lv. 4 
Anxious, to be (uepypvar) ii. 20. 
lv. 6 


Appear (paivecOar) ii. 15 

Appetite, belly (xotAda) iii. 19 

Appointed, to be (xeioOac) i. 16 

Apprehend (xaradapBavetv) iii. 
12, 13 

Approve (Soxiaferv) i. 10 

Arrive (xatavrav) ili, 11 

Ask (épwrdayv) iv. 3 

Attain (f@avecv) iii. 16 


B 
Become, be born (yiyveo@at) i. 
13: ii 4, 8 
Before (umpoo@er) iii. 13 
Beginning (apxy) iv. 15 
Behind (omiow) iii 13 
Beings in heaven, &c. (érovpavior, 
&.) ii, 10 
Believe (miorevewv) i. 29 
Beloved (@yaznrés) ii. 12. iv. 1 
Bend (xapmrecv) ii. 10 
Beseech (mapaxadeiv) iv. 2 
Beware of (BAgre) iii, 2 


108 


Bishop (éricxoros) i. 1 
Blameless (apeprros) ii. 15. iil. 


Blemish, without (aduwpos) ii. 15 

Body (cwpa) i. 20. iii. 21 

Boldness of utterance (xappycia) 
i, 20° 

Bonds (Seopoi) i. 7, 13, 14, 17 

Book (BiBAos) iv. 3 

Brother, brethren (adeAdos, -o/) 
L 12,14. WW. 25. ili. 1, 13, 
17. Iv. 1, 8, 21 


C 

Calling («Aqo1s) ili. 14 

Camp of the guard (mpa:twprov) 
1, 13 | 

Change (peracynparifetr) iil, 21 

Charity (ro émveueés) iv. 5 

Choose (aipeto Gar) 1. 22 

CHRIST L. 10, 13, 15, 17, 18, 20, 
21, 23, 27, 29. UW. 1, 16, lil 
7, 8, 9, 18 

CHRIST JESUS 1. 1, 8, 26. 1. 5, 
21. lil. 3, 8,12,14. iv. 7, 19, 
21 

Church (éxxAyoia) iii 6. Iv. 15 

Circumcision (wepiropy) lil. 3, 5 

Citizenship, citizen-life (aoAirev- 
pa. -everOar) 1, 27. ill. 20 

Clear, pure (¢iAcxpuv7s) 1. 10 

Come (épxeoGat) i. 27. ii. 24. 

Comfort (rapapvOov) ii. 1 

Compassion (olxripyos) ii. 1 

Concision (xararopy) iii. 2 


INDEX I. 


Confess (éfopoAcyetoOaz) 11. II 

Conform, conformed (ovpepop¢gi- 
ev, -hos) iii. 10, 21 

Consistent (axpooxomros) i. 10 

Content (avrdpxys) iv. 11 

Contest, share contest with (ovr- 
add<iv) i. 27. iv. 3 

Continue (pevetv) i. 25 

Continue in (éremevery) 1. 24 

Continue with (rapapévecr) i. 25 

Crooked (cxoAvos) ii. 15 

Cross (ocravpos) li. 8. il, 18 

Crown (arépayos) iv. 1 


D 
Day (iuépa) i. 5 
Day of Christ (4p. Xpeorot) i. 6, 
Io. li. 16 
Deacon (Sidxovos) i. 1 
Dead (vexpos) iii. 11 
Deal, make common cause, with 
_ (xowaveiv, ovyx.) iv. 14, 15 
Death (@avatos) 1. 20. ii. 8, 
27, 30. lL Io 
Defence (aroAoyia) i. 7, 16 
Deficiency (vorépynpa) li. 30 
Depart (avadvew) 1. 23 
Depart (é€pxeoGar) iv. 15 
Desire (érOvpia) i. 23 
Destruction (arwAeia) 1. 28. iii. 
19 
Die (aroOvyjoxev) i, 21 
Disputing (SuaAoyiopos) ii. 14 
Do (rotetv) ii. 14. IV. 14 
Do, practise (rpaccetv) iv. 9 


INDEX lL. 109 


Dog (xvwyr) iii. 2 
Drinkoffering, pour as a (oré- 
dev) il. 17 


E 
Eagerly (o7ovdaius) ii. 28 
Earnest expectation (aroxapa- 
Soxia) i. 20 
Earthly, on earth (émiyeos) ii 
Io. ili, 19 
Empty, to make (xevody) ii. 7 
Enable (évdvvapody) iv. 13 
Encouragement (zapaxAyots) ii. 
I 
End (réXos) ili. 19 
Enemy (éx6pos) iii. 18 
Equal (igos) ii. 6 
Equal in soul (iceyvyos) ii. 20 
Exalt highly (vmepupodr) ii. 9 
Excel (dtadepev) i. 10 


F 

Faith, the faith (riorts, 4 7.) i. 
25,27. ii 17. iiL g 

Fashion (cxjpa) ii. 8 

Fear (doBos) ii. 12 

Fellow-imitator (cvppipyrys) iii. 
17 

Fellow-partner (cvyKowwvos) 1. 7 

Fellow-soldier (cvverpatwirys) 
lL 25 

Fellow-worker (cvvepyos) ii. 25. 
iv. 3 

Fill, fulfil (wAnpovv) 1.11. iL 2. 
iv. 18, 19 


Fill full (yoprafeuv) iv. 12 

Fill up, supply (avazAnpotv) ii. 
30 

Finally (r6 Aowror) iii. 1. iv. 8 

Find (evpioxetv) ii. 8. iii. 9 

Flesh (cap§) i. 22, 24. iii. 3, 4 

Forget (émAavOaverGar) iii. 13 

Form (sop¢7) ii. 6, 7 

Fruit (xapads) i. 11, 22. iv. 17 


G 

Gain, means of (apraypds) ii. 6 

Gain, to gain (xépdos, -aivewv) i. 
21. il 7, 8 

Generation (yevea) ii. 15 

Genuine (yvjovos) ii. 20. iv. 3 

Gift (Sopa) iv. 17 

Giving (ddors) iv. 15 

Glory (dda) i. rr. ii 11. iii. 
19, 21. iv. 19, 20 

Glorying, to glory (xavynpa, 
-aoOa) i. 26. ii 16, iii 3 

God, idol (6eds) iii. 19 

Good courage, be of (eiyrxeir) 
ii. 19 


Goodwill, good pleasure (eb8oxia) 


115. i. 13 
Gospel (evayyéAtov) 1. 5, 7,12, 17, 
27. ii, 22, iv. 3, 15 
Grace (apis) i. 2, 7.. iv. 23 
Gracious (ev¢ypos) iv. 8 
Grant (xapilec@a) i. 29. ii. g 
Grave (cepnvos) iv. 8 — 
Greatly (weyadws) iv. 10 
Guard (dpovpeiv) iv. 7 


ins Soo pet ee eet 


H 
Have in full (dwréyay) iv. 18 
Hear (axovew) i 27, 30. ii. 26. 
Iv. 9 
Heart (xapdia) i. 7. iv. 7 
Heavens (ovpavot ) iii, 20 
Hebrew (“Efpaios) iii. 5 
Help (cvvAapBaver@ar) iv. 3 
High, on (dvw) iii. 14 
Honour, in (évrysos) li. 29 
Hope (éAmis, -ifev) i. 20. ii. 19, 
23 
House, household (oixéa) iv. 22 
Hunger (zewway) iv. 12 


I 
Innocent (axépacos) ii. 15 
Issue in (droBaivey eis) i. 19 


J 

Jeopardy, to put his life in (za- 
paBoreverOar rH W.) li. 30 

JESUS ll. TO 

Jesus CHRisT i. 6, 11, 19. iL 
II 

Joy (xapa) 1. 4, 25. 
iv. I 


ll, 2, 29. 


K 
Kind (zpoo¢uys) iv. 8 
Knee (ydvv) il. 10 
Know (ywooxev, yvevar) 1. 12. 
ii. 19, 22. iil 10, iv. 5 
Know (eidévac) 1. 16, 19, 25. 
iv. 12, 15 


INDEX Ff. 


Know, make kaown '(yivwpier) 
i, 22. iv. 6 

Knowledge (yvwots, éwéyvawis) 
i.g. li. 8 


L 


Labour (xomidv) ii. 16 

Lack (iarepetaPat) iv. 12 

Law (vopos) iii. 5, 6, 9 

Learn (savOavew) iv. 9, II 

Life (wy) i. 20. i. 16. iv. 3 

Life (Yv x7) ii. 30 

Light, luminary (@woryp) ii. 15 

Likeness (cpotwpa) il. 7 

Live ({jv) i 21, 22 

Long, longed for (éruroOety, -6n- 
ro.) i. 8. ii 26. iv. 1 


Lorp (Kvpwos) i. 2, 14. ii. 11, 
24, 29, 30. UL 1, 8 iv. 1, 


2, 4, 5, 10, 23 

Lorp JESUS il. rg 

Lorp Jesus CHRIST iii..20. iv. 
23 

Loss, to suffer loss (fypia, 
-odcOar) ili. 7, 8 

Love (aya7n) i. 9, 16. ii. 1, 2 

Lowliness of mind (razewod¢po- 
cw) li. 3 


M 


Magnify (peyadvvewv) i. 20 

Man (avOpwrros) ii. 7, 8. iv. 5 

Matk (oxomeiv, -ds) ll. 4. til 
14, 17 


ae ne al 





FNDEX f. 


Mercy, to have mercy on (éAceiv) 
ll. 27 

Messenger (drogrodos) ii. 25 

Mind (vois) iv. 7 | 

Mind, be- minded (dpovetx) i. 7. 
ii.2,5. iii rs, Ig. iv. 2, 10 

Ministry, minister (Aeroupgyia, 
~y0s) iL. T7, 253 30 

Multiply (wAcovefeyv) iv. 17 

Multitude (of wAcfoves) i. 14 


Murmuring (yoyyvepos) ii. 14 
N: 

Name (dyoua) ii. 9, 10. iv. 3 

Necessary (dvayxatos) i. 24. ii, 
25 

Need (xpeia) ii. 25. iv. 16; 19 

Nigh, to draw nigh (éyyvs, -ifewv) 
ll. 30. iv. 5 

Nigh to (rapamrAyovov) ii. 27 


O 
Obedient (iayxoos) ii. 8 
Obey (iraxoverv) ii. 12 
Often (zodAdxis) iii. 18 
"Oxranpepos ili. 5 
Once and again (xai arag Kai 
dis) Iv. 15 
Opportunity, lack (dxaipetoGar) 
lv. 10 
Oppose (avrixevorGar) i. 28 
Otherwise (érépws) iii. 15 


pe 
Partisanship (épWeia) i. 17. ii. 3 


It 


Partnership (xocrwpla) i. 5. ii. 
I, “lil. 10 

Pattern (rvos) iii. 17 

Peace (eipyvn) i. 2. iv.'7, 9 

Perception (atoOnors) i. 9 

Perfect (réActos, -odv) li 12, 15 

Perverse (Sveorpappeévos) ii, 15 

Pharisee (®apiaios) iii. 5 

Power, to be able (dvvapus, -ac- 
at) ill. 10 

Praise (€ratvos) i. 11. iv. 8 

Pray: (tpocevxer Oar) i. 9 

Prayer (xpocevyy) iv. 6 

Preach (xnpvocewv) i. 15 

Presence (apovoia) i. 26. ii. 
12 

Present, to (éréyeww) ii. 16 

Pretence (zpddacis) i. 18 

Prize (BpaBetov) ili. 14 

Proclaim (karayyéAAew) i. 17, 
18 

Progress (mpoxory) i. 12, 25 

Proof (évdecgts) i. 28 

Pure (ayvds) iv. 8 

Pursue, persecute (Stwxew) iii. 
6, 12, 14 


R 


Race (yévos) li. 5 


Reach forth to (érexreiver@ar) 
lll. 13 

Receive (déxer Oat, mpood.) ii.-29. 

iv. 18 

Reckon, think {Acyi{er@a:) 
13. iv. 8 


lil. 


It2 INDEX I. 


Refuse (oxvBaAc) iii. 8 

Rejoice (xafpav) i 18. ii. 17, 
18, 28. il. 1. iv. 4, 10 

Remembrance (pyveia) i. 3 

Request (airnpa) iv. 6 

Result in (épxeo@ar eis) i. 12 

Resurrection (avdcracis, éfav.) 
LiL 10, II 

Reveal (azoxaAvrretv) iii, 15 

Revive (avafaAAayv) iv. 10 

Riches (Aotros) iv. 19 

Right, just (dixatos) i. 7. iv. 8 

Righteousness (dtxatoovvy) i. 11. 
lil. 6, 9 

Run (rpéxecv) ii. 16 


S 

Sacrifice (@voia) ii 17. iv. 18 

Saint (dyios) i. 1. iv. 21, 22 

Salute (aowaleo Oat) iv. 21, 22 

Salvation (cwrypia) i. 19, 28. 
ll, 12 

Saviour (cwr7p) ili. 20 

Savour of sweet smell (copy 
evwdias) iv. 18 

Say, will (épw) iv. 4 

Scared (rrvpecOat) i. 28 

Secret, teach the (veiv) iv. 12 

See, saw (eldov) i. 27, 30. ib 
28. iv. 9 

See clearly (aduidciv) ii, 23 

Seek (Cyretv, émi.) ii, 21. iv. 
17 

Send (wéurrev) li, 19, 23, 25, 28. 
Iv. 16 


Servant (SodAos) i. x. id. 7 
Serve (SovAeverv) ii. 22 
Shame, to shame (aicxvvy, -vecv) 

iL 20. iil. 19 


Sick, to be (doeveiv) ii. 26, 27 


Sincerely (adyvas) i. 17 

Sore troubled (adnpovety) 11. 
26 

Sorrow (Avz7) ii. 27 

Sorrowless (dAvzros) ii. 28 

Soul (yuy}) i 27. ii. 2 

Speak (A€yev) lil. 18. iv. 11 

Speedily (raxéws) ii. 19, 24 

Spirit (rvevua) i. 19, 27. iL 1. 
iii. 3. iv. 23 

Stand fast (orjxew) 1.27. iv. I 

Straiten (ovvexety) 1. 23 

Strong, be (toyvew) iv.-13 

Struggle (ayuv) i. 30 

Subject (vroraccew) ill. 21 

Subsist, to be already (vrapyev) 
ii. 6. iii. 20 

Suffer (racyecv) i. 29 

Suffering (zra@ya) ill. 10 

Supplication (Séyots) 1 4, 19. 
iv.6 

Supply (értxopyyia) i. 19 

Support (BeBaiwors) i. 7 

Surpass, transcend (vmepéyew) ii. 
3 Ui. 8 iv. 7 








T 
Take, receive (AapBavev) ii. 7. 
lil, 12 


Taking (Ajpyis) iv. 15 


INDEX I. 


Thank, thanksgiving (evxapvo- 
teiy, -ta) i. 3. Iv. 6 

Thought (vonpa) iv. 7 

Tongue (yAdooa) ii. 11 

Trembling (rpopos) ii. 12 

Tribe (pvA7) ili. 5 

True, truth (aA7Oys, -ea) i. 18. 
iv. 8 

Trust (seroi@nots) iil. 4 

Trust, be persuaded of, (rezot- 
Gévar) i. 6, 14, 25. UM. 24. 
iii, 3, 4 

V q 

Vain, in (eis xevov) ii. 16 

Vainglory (xevodogia) ii. 3 

Virtue (apery) iv. 8 


Ww 
Wait for (amrexdéxeo6at) ili. 20 
Walk (zepirarety) ili. 17, 18 


113 


Walk (croixety) ili. 16 

Want (vorépyots) iv. 11 

Weep (xAaéew) iii, 18 

Wellpleasing (evdpeoros) iv. 18 

Will (6€Aey) li. 13 

Witness (paprus) i. 8 

Word (Acyos) i. 14. iL 16 

Work (épyor) i. 6, 22. il. 30 

Work out (xarepyafer Oar) ii. 12 

Working, to work (évépyeta, 
-yeiv) 11, 13. ll. 21 

Workman (épyarys) iii. 2 

World (xoopos) il. 15 

Worship (Aarpevewv) ili. 3 


Y 
Yea (vai) iv. 3 
Yokefellow (ovvévyos) iv. 3 


Z 
Zeal (€Xos) iii. 6 


IT. 


INDEX OF TEXTS QUOTED OR REFERRED TO 


IN 


xix. 26 


— XXV. 40 
XXVlil. 35 
Xxix, I 
XX1x. 40, 41 
XXX. 32, 33 
KXXIV. 5, d&kC, ....000.- 


REXV5LT, WG ciaviacss 


THE 


NOTES. 
PAGE 
Deut. 8 ssouiniss cusses 58 
ome MXXILG GV psaucanstnats 56 
x Sam. li, 11 .......000eee0. 58 
Rh 1. 2¥ ssiacescesascvecss 48 
1 Chron, xxix, 20......... 52 
Kigr@ 11.62 sccusvisnisesssieas go 
Nehem, Vil. §.......c.cese0 go 
Esther Vil. 9 .........0.000 50 
OO Sie 12 psd evendten ces 47 
NN ici chewedieaerass 27 
Psalm vill. 6 ............5.. 87 
me oe eee 99 
i VILL 7 shsiwtecnmasdeon 97 
Ba EXEL S eaaicieoaessins g2 


INDEX II. 


PAGE 
Psalm xxxiv. 18 ......... gt 
ee fe «errr ee ee 60 
— WHHL If oe 101 
a LEH GQ) cenawassetacves 52 
Ss U1 28 hese cae avens » go 
SCRE TSE casectiedess gt 
wae OXI 1S: celassccnteive ab. 
IPPON s ly 22 sspcpuaee see ienens 28 
Sees Ty, OP s)raaalemassinaw sues ab. 
ee ere IOI 
Vead AV eS ash cus Uindeedveres go 
KV: Cocicvncassac/enedes 80 
eee Ok 56 
eet KULOS* Siiacusigebeees 94 
ae RIV, 29> Acwsrrcasioeess 51 
— Lith 10, IT ccccscccvees 60 
SIXT. 9 vecesssssvesieeciecs 29 
Jerem. 1X. IL peeseeeeeeeeeee 69 
Ezek, Xi1L Q ...scseeeeeeees go 
mm EVIL 24 wrcvccccecseess 97 
Dan. Xi Tow. ceceee seen go 
Hos. Xii. 4 wee cece eee ees 42 
Hab. lib. 3 ...cceeeereseeeees 94 
Zech, Vis 13 see scessaeseses 94 
Wisdom iv. © ...e.eeeeeee 94 
Ecclus, iv. 7 ...ccccsseeases 94 


115 

PAGE 

Eeclus. XX. 13 ...seeeeeees 94 
— EXXUM. 21° sasestensans 28 
Se? | ty Be er re 100 
t Macc. v. 64 ......000. - 94 
Matt. 11:9 ce ckessiearitincaees 56 
Sil, OF craaarnnnexeeses » 52 
SMO) wstasncteandsacn » 69 
SAVE OTs nuaainasetans 80 
OVE BF ticensceueneataces 26 
SVL 258,50 Geaheoies IOL 
ree W126 tisuidewwancsaeneeas gI 
ae WE. 13. cnareseacone ses 41 
cee SY eee 68 
Get Ky TO! Siivievnsevasewewes 55 
ee a a ore 50 
See LDS. Vel ecwsuinwaas ones 52 
=: IC (9 sietaesetesseets 49 
EBS > unebaasedsers 82 
XV, 20) sivncicieseases 67 
SRV. 18 veasuscucccenass 71 
SS EVIL IG. asictirednravnss 74 
— XVL. 26 ic. ceecccen ees 73 
SS: MVM OTD sins edu snes ses 56 
SS KVL TL]? aoeciwitvciaie 71 
SS MKS 20> -e indestsesas 76 
oe EK D suissanieedweleas en 68 
SRR TE cusgensiiess 55 
ee oe ee 50 
SSN 9B -seascearcassvan 80 
= XXIV. 30 ciscievsescane 56 
KEL, 9 Sicd a cvndousceese gI 
—_ XXV. 26 ..ccceseccesees 66 
eee. Se re ee 63 


INDEX II. 


PAGE 

Mark i: sccchcnetyaes 100 
AV 22s siorese asst 30 
WALs 5: eacdsenses deceives 83 
PES TG comsassyarsewses te 104 
4 | ee Aa Sere ere 48 
KU 20. scatepesunewets 67 
Ri AA. asses csess ovens 97 
Elle 10; Sisseci cesses: 79 
MN 129: ascouseisis~s: gt 
ZIV. 39: - ciscavedasesncs 63 
KVi1G. sccceieeetiieis 104 

> Sey Pr ee 64 

b 4 3 ey enn er er re 54 
1 <a eee reer 48 
SSP ANCS. ceeeicinesecares ses 35 
97 sxc nosterencess 41 
1ic9D.. aveceasies.aasaees 27 

1 7. een err ee 32 

Me! 37's 68 
Mi eeScoranaeoesest 56 
AV 1 Os iavosetsavtagsger 102 

Vs. Tidenessibsnceourenees 89 

We 30: sasssscatecccstaed 55 
VAs 27 iss eitesicceaetone 99 
W124 GaioaruGuaaenisioas 101 
Vilo-2 Snares heeadees 64 
Vile A wangieac chretunes 63 
WHL-18> cites sieoncer: 81 
WULAS. sstactat vende 37 
126 cc itsancersnsaseges 73 
WEEAS.  eceueclinatace 28 
XS OD sereionsdiminaesns 79 
aa A. trtcndposeudeeslecs 104 


PAGE 
Di) <> er) ere eee 52 
Kis Ossi eveassacesee re 
pot ay Aan eee re ae ee 28 
> 1 ie SE nee g! 
KMsAS. sseeeradiiaedns 98 
MUL. $0 eeeeee essere eee 37 
MIViATA, wokiachevoa temas 77 
MVM: TS isceasscwesesies 49 
EVM BO. oud Mosse es 24 
MIR AS. pooxciiiau ets 37 
BEL AG? Sveti ecesensc EO5 
ML 25) cot aektengs 37 
MMM. A 3 cipecsensosa ces ab 
REA Ps ocisentasics 52 
REV 36 es cctcnes aryaes g! 
RXV 38 cose sctvnscene 55 
EKIVs AG oxoscention cusses 2 
POON WE 6h sildehewtidnces 46 
SS My A ave st sessions ans 57 
1s § cespnebecsucue mente 56 
lv. I4.. 57 
BV; 304 ccenaqecoesees Iol 
Victdy AO’ crtieoseease 57 
Ve BO) ctiaciacosetan aus 77 
V2 7 inven oes iadwaces 53 
WL AF ohcnetnwedeeteaans 55 
Whe 57 cdieeeashacnewens 36 
WE, OG iaciseieesneeeeee 79 
Wills T2? pcndecwdteeeanss 83 
Md, 35S nciexeaxceneys wb. 
MU D2 iacwcee Casees. a3 48 
MVE Sib ccwcvesez eta: 50 
MVUle FT : spaadesen oan 87 


INDEX IL 117 


PAGE PAGE 
PSCtS The 10 sae hisadeiee: 80 «= Acts XX1V. 16 ......eceeee 29 
A, AO sialon slew touted SG XKV. 13 ceeeccceeeeeee 104 
LW Po sreteuweeqnnetes 87 KEV: sicdecwesceries 70 
BV 30 siscsietax waeaneseh Af SE RRVL TS secccccccwesiens 68 
Wi 30" sceeiaeereas arctan 49 — XXVI1 10, II ......0. 71 
Wick sswsdiveccaiuines 55 — XXVIL 10, 21 ......... 72 
VileHA- -acicseveebdes ons $3 KEVIN 23 cesisccssans 69 
Vill Tick ioskisitsaseaiocs 7I 9 —— KXVUL. T6 ow. esse eee 30 
af 1 ee eee ere 86 
BS. 3 COUCh~ Sassshsceees Te ee 87 
1 POD geen tebe otitens 99 — i Q ccscceccceccccccccnes 69 
1X CO cinciese denne ros 66 = 110: veiniteresusensdcs 76 
Me AO: inavidentencastins 35 LL cee eeeesecceneeees 26 
Rls 2 Soin sivelaweasreeees 1 ne Ce y Me rrr ee 74 
RVs fo did tensenecsassees 11: ets OY SPT eeeeeeTeeeee sree’ 102 
KVL” sswssawsscewsa Al pee ALO: eee eee caceseasnae’ 32 
XVL 19, &e. ......... G05). mem Ms TB) wajasvieee ea giece tas 28 
MVD. “sosiaeerenbans YOO. 9 =r 15.20 aside iwesntous 68 
RVI 2 -sowdeevee navies LOL —- — FU, 29 cee eseeceeeeneeees 94 
RVUL. 5S ceddiecvedesesas 100° = NO agit ceseiaeens 33 
MEE 27 eeweeidaanesai B50 SSM BE chs sascanocaaantes 74 
MIS, 1S: cissscenseceise 52 5 20 dus chssanant AI 
MIE 25- ~cacevesadareiier GG: SS AVA: Aasaswicsectunays 22 
RN TD ccabsoveeeivoranss TOR SH AVEO awiditienesaieie. 68 
EEG: sichasonincsasans BB. AV. BO catincecusanecuwes 82 
> Oa 0 eee 56 AV. 13 cescenscccececescs 56 
EXL GO csisuduccweiaveass ZZ Wu Qy TO cecccccoecssces 53 
XXL 2A acecsrcvinwinks SQ ee Vs DR: cwncenesteianeness 78 
EX 34: usacsisnete eens GO Sy 12 sicmane sie stwaseoes 86 
5 > a) Nee Vey, ee OG VENA, eecusventeicueees 83 
KX 14 oecstersescetic $5. VERO: ~visweadses 5° 
> C11 Ae eT re rer SO). SVT: rick itiientsees 38 
EEUU 6: vee ciacasans fo FOo SV 8 WE. ccardvsees 76 
ARRIVIAA: siectioetanianss QF VL kargsteecaas wwe. Os 


INDEX ILI. 


PAGE PAGE 
ROMS Wi TGS levsdizianee tes 33 Rom. xi. 13 ...........2 00 78 
Ml TO bes ciewesteckss AQ: es RAMS seep sasenses 95 
WELT] diviecoreceseewes so ace, 1) ial < en earner 94 
WI 6: Giger eeeis 61 Se RIL U.S ote ee eeesed 4! 
WHT cabs decuasseee. Fh KEV. Ql cacccsccncencce 75 
VEN Sead scarcer sosuaws AQ SV. 1S» kidesccsedese, 102 
WL EL: seeectisescsess 105. = RIV 10 esdsnncecdewoes 78 
WUE 10 ic sisiossanacecs IOS XV. 8 oo... eee eee eee 68 
WNL D7 usc sccesvausons MO SSK Ov sssiensvonceceyees 52 
VIL. EO ss cspccnavacoees 35,86 — xv. 15, 16 ............ 58 
VEL. 20 -anevedsnseedses SG. =" KV. 30) wieakscdedscaas 40 
VIN 29, 25 sas eda veuinns Oe: $V 23 tuaaceveetaeds 96 
VIG M24- cvcecwetd dues BS SSK staksdiceeedede 71 
WH 28. aicceiesilvccsees SA SVS est ehevoee Sean. 40 
WII 20” aii hiwaiowies 87 — xvi, 2 64 
Vil. 30: acsgstovieaeies BO. SV EVL 5 OS tease 104 
WL 87 asevssavanevens SO. SS EVA TO! ecesedisveccccc 2b 
IRA, heosageasesnasaes G8. = AVE A ssceesReeiiecs 83 
1K °1Qy 20" ataueasenes Fa, SS VEGE?. nonsceptenoees 95 
N23 cessestaseresdeses 102 - — Xvi 17, 18............ 84 
ERS 30 horiecarteniveecst 9S eee KVL TO: casceasineieets 55 
bas are ore PT5O2 SS KVL BO" i wiscdientesines 96 
Mi; csiaseresseesseites 90 SRW Ber etastiwt evade 42 
KG: cesissicideiece 52 
MTA: aispstineeciedes 65° 2 Cory 1 Asx winsiensacedee 23 
MATS saaceeewsdeste 1 ae Cay Lee eer Tree ree 86 
MU E25 TS cissuaesoens BO: Be TO. ds reveevesovessoas 104 
MAES wccscetraniascisss 90 S128. auscanators aeacads 50 
Rh 22523 * aieondsves: 38 20. sisreuesucaeaes 104 
Ki 3B svinuscdenssececase FOS SO. eee eens 89 
R36 sasieveseicesats Ce SE: UP ERA er ere eee 81 
bc ie Garr ee err BO ee MN DG sia sascaasie teens 73 
MBs Ts See seussiacesenians $O2: 2 1V. 5 eeeeecececsenas 95 
MIL TO" sengueseavonsie AS SVs TO ww ivecsnsacreeetens 83 





INDEX II. 


PAGE 

t Cor. vi. 6,8 sxisicsdsses 4I 
Vis ET acaiseteness 103 
WAS TG, cclsedeavestivescs 105 
V1 TQ iecesestaiasens vee 00. 
WiLTS sietincowpeeds 54 
WI BT “Qicsecetenieees 49 
Wall, °4 chews uewronede es 27 
WINGS: ‘dcvveweasaents 99 
1X FO asvevesciiss veces: 31 
bey Penna eer ere 78 
TR: 2A avarswcceiesesticns 79 
UX, 242 escewssaens 40 
1X25. cel cndestacsaunes’ 88 
9X6. 26 sca dicaisivecaaens 57 

> Oe Ee Te 83 
BIO: Gosishucressncsets 55 

i TA: cssvedicnsotesdsse 53 
KF eisicciveces eer. fd 

Ki; 2A heise scecesesnaws 45 

Ko 2A. cat asetieene 60 

Me 22 asian vectiew samurai 29 
Rl. T -siseedeeriacens 83 
Ely FO cae oeuts coasts 69 
ee TS caw eter ecdacdex 71 
oe KL 92s sahinds setuaceaes 56 
tN 9’: was venerometenees 52 
SILAS” -aieassevetans 71 
se SUNG wieahacessneaddcen 60 
Sat KWo Be raiiniensailapewees 78 
= MIVs 10,28 sated cesses 71 
ei KIViSO "as dwessicows ieee 78 
SRLV EBS: scdnvsedsanian'et 105 
RSTIVE RS jessvniuudeviees 96 
eee ae Sk er ere 95 
ma EV 2 eaiicbeesecveeasacs 53 


IIg 

PAGE 

t Core XV; O° Seeseaziseiaen 71 
— xv. 27, &. «ose 87 

ae XVEAA- Sacdonsesesveus 80 

PS EVCAQ sadinesesene sts 86 

RVs Oiitetietirnane 4I 

Se KVL 1S | -secpnneadensess 104 

EV 16, 1S ss icateee ave 64 

ee RW AY cccesosmvenes we = 65 

— XV]. 20 viceccccscceees 104 

B OGRA G acscces recites 75 
eS TT, sche sansecancieces 34 

ee Se rr ere 57 

set eK er rere 26 

See LAY . asewepoowsaeceseed 37 

HS 51, 0 gateteslevrouswve 31 

SMSO). casts oasanwieirs 61 

AVES: wovevevereeniease 52 

SAV TOe IT. scsaseinseaes 75 

Se AV Td anninsnrauiacsiacs 58 

oe AVE AG ai chasaaneunuenss 31 

eS Ws TG cescc ines iaeeases 34 

ere AVG TF Wudicotesmerscsoss 73 

ANE 1S snsasieisalamasins 45 

ee ae ere 80, 86 
ee ae re 49, 74 

am MC ee 78, 86 
ma a ee 37 
eh ee 102 
SS VEO) Siveeacincsng onus 56 
Sa Vs: Ee coeeesdieeastiees 57 
Ste 2 ain dcawevstdeniues 4I 
a VG 2 “od dedseteniaans 102 
Bee Wi 8) -ansnteke > iaws caine’ 29 
Ses WA 2 dat raveteccaenemes 27 


120 


— vii. 9 
— Vil. II 
— vil. 15 
— viil. 4 





INDEX II. 121 


PAGE PAGE 
Eph. i. 13 ..... 95 Eph. vito. ............04. 99 
BiokS venvatecvauwanalys AY Se VL 18 cakinweisianicncee gI 
BEb: ceveweseeouavedees BQ: SV 10 ait everienantowens 35 
Be18, LC. * Gs scaetentee 750 SOV BO exisaaipieawiedeaes 30 
As YO} AO coat tas desea: 50, 87 
Mi 2d -etaasctecatnsusa ne BE [COLO scnuiuvedsonteemetes 95 
W228: deen eetededns WE HRT he catewatnamsaiecnes 95 
My 250 2: scetedsicen cosas BG. 1s Oi aseivedecnswarensunas 59 
M458 Soscaeetsaneats Be SS TO: act iancieness 40 
WG yO Sed vaddee leaves 53 1 18, 24... cceeee eens 71 
US O2srcentiemuewnic B5 mL 20 nee ccccrcese scene 50 
HO vawomsandvehmanages AY “Se 20 caritebeceesiviets 84 
My. PT weetoviauedusxieds GS 28 tiie tuenslocciens 55 
AL 04> pipaedaaeeaniovaies tb Bete 1 OS: “aatasnaaveveweaeng 31 
Wi 1G Ssepensies cauepaced BO; dies vases daheancicains 38 
Bs 26) Giaadsvaevansavexs PA TB weareneel ie tees 95 
WiS: icereueecasaeeseae WAS Pe BOGA: Gil iivecoseasens 75 
lil, g . QO SA Tice wsrentensn scans 42 
Mle D4 sr ceaviesaniewmsecier G2 SO aga catendiinwtieans 95 
Wi 10 seis evvsncessnnees Q2 0 NL cekeectecscsenues 92 
Mle 1 cabeseaiseeeeseewvs 163° SPL) ari vieenigearees 51 
IVs Ei asbvowesieding tens BO- UL. 10 wists vsnicsions 34 
AV. A. esdpucassdinieenne TOG. M223 ade snancnsascecnns 64 
LV. J=—=16 |. dsdsdaccwdss 42 — lil. I—4...36,42, 60, 80, 85 
Ved Fuctesscuaaewe 76 UD, 12 cose eecee eee eee 27 
We 26 sGatsesusauerccsing 34 AVL TS coe e cee ecee enone 104 
LW: 20 apicseudasiounecse 95 
ee IU OT oad eateehe<aews 95 rt Thess, i. 6 ........0cceeee 83 
= AV 2O wiiiveosaateants Qh LT cee eveeeecteneeeee nes 83 
are ee ee ee io Oe 42 
Se Ve Divcseasneaces vnnevane TOR) Meg. shee ote eeeaseaes 42 
ee er eT ee 69.0 = 14 kaka 28 
i. VeAO aan ee eear tas aan G2 —- —_ TL 5, LO wee ceeseeeeceee 26 
ee Oe Bh, SSeS  chectslaciencsaaues 105 


INDEX. II. 


PAGE PAGE 
r Thess. ii. 13 ............ 95 1 Tim. iv. 12.............0. 83 
Mee TO coccasseneites cae 57,00) SOV. TO dai scaspeetanines 38 
WES A scare ysenecsesens B2) SWS ce acccietacanaeses gI 
WEG) Aeacieeaad eetaced GF SS Wiha’ aadinsevigadishass 4I 
Mis: esocsudeaweeeaanes BO VE 22 otis iaeeeenc kes 33 
Ward. skecaheeeaiesaaids » SOG Re VS: witictcudserieave 84 
BV. 1 vicsishebraseiesetay O65. NG -cascestegseied. 97 
WTS. cceuisuecaenvenees SRS NLS coc ccenaseticdants 42 
AVG TO: vusetainsae vases 77 
Ve TO Sincinoadiewneses 93-22 UMs Ie B ticcsertetoana cts 69 
W.1G sour centietins 66 ee AEA ieeeed aeeuahateehdee 26 
WS iseeeccteetees OS TSS Ts iweciorbemnacs 95 
Vic E casswasaueeteas ot Cee OR ty SND, erent 63 
Vi Oa) Soomupars sanction TOG, SMS. Tiadonsayceise weariness 99 
Wei 25° sivenrapecsiaesaes 9B SLD ca saceraecedene sce 95 
Wi20 diererictontes TOf4: 1. Bn. ese ee eee eees 92 
SS 1V 0. Gaeetiaeenateaeee’ 37> 57 
2 Thess. i. 5—7.........00. AE SAVE & oksieetoieaccesss 42, 57 
met Te TT “aeesensdsaswovaras 5A HY BS hocecigaticsesenss 88 
ee: ANNs! -oeewiadaavne tones 65 — iv. 16... ea ee 25 
MLO. icesseccstasargese Qo SS eine caataneeses 99 
eee reer rae i oe Aer) ree ee ree 105 
0 ee 2 ee ee 40 
TIGA. . -phesgesettesdeenees 60 
| Gia U0 Rip Cae Renee OS: “SAT sistant 84 
15.3 isocsatnereen cedeotes BS) Sls? heroueanentons 94 
NAS atinesteexenaants 90° SS ALS aviiercoiincsctces 33 
BOTS: sesicagasucstacnis LQ Se 7 mn sae tincpicwwneas 83, 94 
Mek. Aahiesanavtomsores OF: SSO) cians aiceees 102 
1) ey Se ee ee O44 S.A EE Sinttiaioeddanscce 26 
Wn Bo sicdestoescceseess SS MD, 2 cccssnseenccsnacce gI 
VL 9! ecsacdateteleiiecis go 
HA agiieise sane 94 Philem. 2 ..............666 62 
Tle O:. Aveiisteeabeundeds 10. eee Te Me eee 26 
Vis TT orig sa senatesesens Dg EOL, went evs tion ene 89 


INDEX IL 123 


PAGE PAGE 

Wrhtlenic V5 wastes ecesatioss 101 Heb, Xiil. 14 .......ceeeeeee 85 

29> Sietegeiaudes 26,88 — XU. 15 .........-. 58, 102 

Qe acdsee sei omeeen: 61 — XL 16 oo. cceeeee eee 102 

St BE dawayveavnetecswee: we TOS 9 —_ XML 21 .. sees reese eee 54 

Heb. 1. TA: cosseccwasesveewss 7 a ne ee ee 98 

a GS whaeeeaceeecnrea. 87 — ii 14, eer ee 32 

WL, Q nee cccccccceeevces SI — iil. [eS cctiucincveants 85 

As 10: sepekeueeesebess CE ey acetone gt 

My. 34. eseeatssconseeeeen 63 ey, A. . aesssscewssinssieas 68 

a EE ee ee 52 
i ae eer 80 

ee ee ey Whee eGuides #2 

a eee a 93 

a eee 85 ee ee ae ee 80 

ViG ecaiwersesancen - 84 —— i Ee, Seeeeerce tesa tte 55 

Wl. 10) oseslanawanennwens G6 ee ee ee 51, 52, 87 

VLCEG> shasta: YT MM a 64 

a re nee a I -hateaanaaucwess 58, 102 

IX. 1,6 ccccseescaceees 6 TD . sdsjastssavaes 56, 91 

eG ceaneieeieeest 63 MN 2 cee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 33 

1X; answisqacesdensies ay ON BS 75 

a ee ss —”* 2. weweseaseani asm’ 83 

1b ee te eee ee Sa. See gt 

X. 1, EA secsssccesseess py We A cereesserensen ans 104 
Kid ~ weamecseiooeezess 68 

Sak 6: are ee erty ree AY. 2: POLAT cciiseedessewes 60 

— XL. 10, 16 .sccccceeess | ce OK MEETETrereeee ree 94 

SKE AO cereus evansect ’ yd a Meee 34, 94 

aera, ¢ 1 ee eee err AP SSD 10. es eeeVetnnceadaees 54 

Sa, ccaeelace sonatas 50. SAP sce ccanes 34 

SR BA .cihsseeeueeeoes es: Se Ok merrier 84 

FIL 8 Sesdseenseseses 57.90 == MQ) wehseessneveeiasas 94 


124 
PAGE 

KD ON 1528 S090: soe ssceue 56 
ee AL BO Sia rnverde cence 35 
fe ar ee 92 
eee ere 56 

3 John 6 oe. e cece ee eee 40 
cet ee re ee 83 

SST, ssteenpatannineenaune 104 

PUGO TZ {ssadivesdtesowaes 85 
ee eee ee 55 


INDEX II. 


— 118 


ry 
bu 
om 


a a 


w 


in 69 —§3 tn 
tn 


om Co a» € 
Oomm owe SAS 


CAMBRIDGE: PRINTED BY C. J. CLAY, M.A. & SON, AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS. 


1y 














WORKS 


BY 


The Very Reverend CHARLES J. VAUGHAN, D.D., 


DEAN OF LLANDAFF AND MASTER OF THE TEMPLE, 





‘Y'emple Sermons. Crown 8vo. 10s. 6d. 


A.uthorised or Revised? Sermons on some of the Texts 
in which the Revised Version differs from the Authorised. Crown 8vo. 
7s. 6d. 


‘st Paul’s Epistle to the Romans. The Greek Text with 
English Notes. Fifth Edition. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d. 


Lectures on the Epistle to the Philippians. Fourth 
Edition. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d. 


Lectures on the Revelation of St John. Fifth Edition. 
Crown 8vo. 10s. 6d. 


Epiphany, Lent, and Easter. A Selection of Expository 
Sermons. Third Edition. Crown 8vo. 10s. 6d. 

Memorials of Harrow Sundays. Sermons preached in 
Harrow School Chapel. Fifth Edition. Crown 8vo. 10s. 6d. 

Twelve Discourses on Subjects connected with the 
Liturgy and Worship of the Church of England. Fourth Edition. 
Feap. 8vo. 6s. 

Lessons of Life and Godliness. A Selection of Sermons 
preached in the Parish Church of Doncaster. Fourth and Cheaper 
Edition. Feap. 8vo. 38. 6d. 

Words from the Gospels. A Second Selection of Sermons 
preached in the Parish Church of Doncaster. Third Edition. Fecap. 
8vo, 4s. 6d. 

The Epistles of St Paul. For English Readers, Part I. 


containing the First Epistle to the Thessalonians. Second Edition. 
8vo. Ils. 6d. 


The Church of the First Days. 


Series I. The Church of Jerusalem. Third Edition. 4s. 6d. 
II. The Church of the Gentiles. Third Edition. 4s. 6d. 
Ill. The Church of the World. Third Edition. Feap.8vo. 4s. 6d. 

Life’s Work and God’s Discipline. Three Sermons. 
Third Edition. Extra feap. 8vo. cloth. 28. 6d. 

The Wholesome Words of Jesus Christ. Four Sermons 
preached before the University of Cambridge in November 1866. 
Second Edition. IF cap. 8vo. 33. 6d. 

Foes of Faith. Sermons preached before the University of 
Cambridge in November 1868. Second Edition. Feap. 8vo. 38. 6d. 


MACMILLAN AND CO., LONDON 


Works by the Very Rev. C. J. Vaughan, D.D., continued. 


Christ Satisfying the Instincts of Humanity. Eight 
Lectures delivered in the Temple Charch. Second Edition. Extra 
feap. 8vo. 3e. 6d. 

The Book and the Life, and other Sermons, preached 
before the University of Cambridge. Third Edition. Feap. 8vo. 
4s. 6d. 

Counsels for Young Students. Three Sermons preached 
before the University of Cambridge at the Opening of the Academical 
Year, 1870—71. Feap. 8vo. 2s. 6d. 

The Two Great Temptations. The Temptation of the 
Man and the Temptation of Christ. Lectures delivered in the Temp!e 
Church, Lent, 1872. Second Edition. Feap. 8vo. 3s. 6d. 

Words from the Cross, Lent Lectures, 1875, and 
Thoughts for these Times, University Sermons, 1874. Extra fcap. 8vo. 
4s. 6d. 

Addresses for Young Clergymen, delivered at Salisbury 
in September and October 1875. Extra fcap. 8vo. 4s. 6d. 

Heroes of Faith. Lectures on Hebrews xii Extra fcap. 
8vo. 6s. 

The Young Life Equipping itself for God’s Service. 
Sermons before the University of Cambridge. Sixth Edition. Extra 
feap. 8vo. 3s. 6d. 

The Solidity of True Religion, and other Sermons. 
Second Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. 3s. 6d. 

Sermons Preached in the Chapel of Harrow School 
(1847). 8vo. 10s. 6d. 

Nine Sermons preached for the most part in the Chapel 
of Harrow School (1849), Crown 8vo. 6s. 

‘My Son, Give me thine heart.” Sermons preached before 
the Universities of Oxford and Cambridge, 1876—1878, Extra fcap. 
8vo. 58. 


The Lord’s Prayer. Second Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. 3s, 6d. 


Rest Awhile. Addresses to Toilers in the Ministry. Extra 
fcap. 8vo. 5s. 

Notes for Lectures on Confirmation. With Suitable 
Prayers. Thirteenth Edition, Feap. 8vo. 1s. 6d. 


Rays of Sunlight for Dark Days. A Book of Selections 


for the Suffering. With a Preface by C. J. Vaucuan, D.D. New 
Edition. 18mo. 3s, 6d. 


MACMILLAN AND CO., LONDON. 





tg ee eg a 


MESSRS MACMILLAN & CO.’s PUBLICATIONS. 


By J. B. LIGHTFOOT, D.D., Bishop of Durham. 
ST PAUL’S EPISTLE TO THE GALATIANS. A 


Revised Text, with Introduction, Notes, and Dissertations. Seventh 
Edition, revised. S8vo. 125, 
ST PAUL’S EPISTLE TO THE PHILIPPIANS. A 


Revised Text, with Introduction, Notes and Dissertations. Seventh 
Edition, revised. 8vo. 125. 


ST PAUL’S EPISTLES TO THE COLOSSIANS 


AND TO PHILEMON. A Revised Text, with Introduction, Notes, 
and Dissertations. Sixth Edition, revised. 8vo. 125, 


By BROOKE FOSS WHSTCOTT, D.D. 


A GENERAL SURVEY OF THE HISTORY OF 
THE CANON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT DURING THE 
FIRST FOUR CENTURIES. Fifth Edition, revised, with Preface on 
“‘ Supernatural Religion.’’ Crown 8vo. Ios. 6d. 


INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF THE 
FOUR GOSPELS. Sixth Edition. Crown 8vo. ros. 6d. 


THE BIBLE IN THE CHURCH. A Popular Ac- 
count of the Collection and Reception of the Holy Scriptures in the 
Christian Churches. Eighth Edition. 18mo. 45. 6d. 

A GENERAL VIEW OF THE HISTORY OF THE 
ENGLISH BIBLE. Second Edition. Crown 8vo. tos. 6a. 


THE HISTORIC FAITH. Short Lectures on the 


Apostles’ Creed. Second Edition. Crown 8vo. 65. 


THE EPISTLES OF ST JOHN. The Greek Text, 


with Notes and Essays. 8vo. 125. 6d. 


THE REVELATION OF THE FATHER. Short 
Lectures on the Titles of the Lord in the Gospel of St John. Cr. 8yo. 65. 


THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE ORIGINAL 
GREEK. The Text Revised by B, F. Westcott, D.D., and F, J. A. 
Hort, D.D. 2 vols, Crown 8vo. ros. 6d. each. 


Vol. I. Text. Vol. II. The Introduction and Appendix. 


A COMPANION TO THE GREEK TESTAMENT 
AND THE ENGLISH VERSION. By Puivurp Scuarr, D.D., 
President of the American Committee of Revision. With Facsimile 
Illustrations of MSS. and Standard Editions of the New Testament. 
Crown 8vo. 125, 


THE HEBREW STUDENT'S COMMENTARY ON 
ZECHARIAH, HEBREW AND LXX. With Excursus on Syllable- 
dividing, Metheg, Initial Dagesh, and Siman Rapheh. By W. H. Lowe, 
es Hebrew Lecturer at Christ’s College, Cambridge. Demy 8vo. 
105, 6d. 


MACMILLAN & CO., LONDON, 


= 


MESSRS MACMILLAN & CO.’s PUBLICATIONS. 


WORKS BY CHENHUIX TRENCH, D.D. 
NOTES ON THE PARABLES OF OUR LORD. 


Fourteenth Edition, revised. 8vo. 125. 

NOTES ON THE MIRACLES OF OUR LORD. 
Twelfth Edition, revised. 8vo. 

SYNONYMS OF THE NEW TESTAMENT. Ninth 
Edition, revised. 8vo. 125. 

COMMENTARY ON THE EPISTLES TO THE 
SEVEN CHURCHES IN ASIA. Third Edition, revised. 8vo. 8s. 6¢. 

By the Rev. A. C. JENNINGS, B.A. and the Rev. W. H. LOWE, M.A. 

THE PSALMS, WITH INTRODUCTIONS AND 
CRITICAL NOTES. By Rev. A. C. JENNINGS, M.A.; assisted in 
Parts by Rev. W. H. Lowg, M.A. In2 vols. Second Edition, revised. 
Crown 8vo. 10s. ina each. 

. 7. LLEWELYN DAVIBS, M.A 

THE EPISTLES OF ST PAUL TO THE EPHE- 
SIANS, THE COLOSSIANS, AND PHILEMON; with Introduc- 
tions and Notes, and an Essay on the Traces of Foreign Flements in the 
Theology of these Epistles. By the Rev. J. LLEWELYN DaviIEs, M.A., 
Rector of Christ Church, St Marylebone, late Fellow of Trinity College, 
alas — Edition. Demy 8vo. 7s. pm 

FPREDERIC RENDALL, 

THE EPISTLE. TO THE HEBREWS. ie Greek and 
English. With Critical and Explanatory Notes. Edited by the Rev. 
FREDERIC RENDALL, M.A., formerly Fellow of Trinity College, Cam- 
bridge, and Assistant Master at Harrow a ee ahaa 8vo. 6s. 

By JOHN EADIE, D.D 

THE EPISTLE TO THE THESSALONIANS, COM- 
MENTARY ON THE GREEK TEXT. By Joun EADIE, D.D., 
LL.D. Edited by the Rev. W. Younc, M.A., with Preface by Professor 
CAIRNS. 8vo. 125. 

By BDWIN A. ABBOTT, D.D. and W. G. RUSHBROOEL, ML. 

THE COMMON TRADITION OF THE SYNOPTIC 
GOSPELS, in the Text of the Revised Version. By EDWIN A. ABBOTT, 
D.D., formerly Fellow of St John’s College, Cambridge, and W. G. 
RUSHBROOKE, M.L., formerly Fellow of St John’s College, Cambridge. 
Crown 8vo. - 6d. 

Y MATTHEW ARNOLD, D.C.L. 

ISAIAH XL. LXV. With the Shorter Prophecies 
allied to it. Arranged and Edited, with Notes, by MATTHEW ARNOLD. 
Crown 8vo. 55. 

ISAIAH OF *TERUSALEM, IN THE AUTHORISED 
ENGLISH VERSION. With Introduction, Corrections, and Notes, 
By MATTHEW ARNOLD. Crown 8vo. 45. ay 

By Rev. F. PROCTER, 

A HISTORY OF THE BOOK “OF COMMON 
PRAYER; WITH A RATIONALE OF ITS OFFICES. By 
FRANCIS PROCTER, M.A. Seventeenth Edition, revised and enlarged. 
Crown 8vo._ 10s, 6d. 


» MACMILLAN & CO., LONDON. 





——s